TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 D D D D D D High-Performance Static CMOS Technology − 25-ns Instruction Cycle Time (40 MHz) − 40-MIPS Performance − Low-Power 3.3-V Design Based on TMS320C2xx DSP CPU Core − Code-Compatible With F243/F241/C242 − Instruction Set and Module Compatible With F240 Flash (LF) and ROM (LC) Device Options − LF240xA: LF2407A, LF2406A, LF2403A, LF2402A − LC240xA: LC2406A, LC2404A, LC2403A, LC2402A On-Chip Memory − Up to 32K Words x 16 Bits of Flash EEPROM (4 Sectors) or ROM − Programmable “Code-Security” Feature for the On-Chip Flash/ROM − Up to 2.5K Words x 16 Bits of Data/Program RAM − 544 Words of Dual-Access RAM − Up to 2K Words of Single-Access RAM Boot ROM (LF240xA Devices) − SCI/SPI Bootloader Up to Two Event-Manager (EV) Modules (EVA and EVB), Each Includes: − Two 16-Bit General-Purpose Timers − Eight 16-Bit Pulse-Width Modulation (PWM) Channels Which Enable: − Three-Phase Inverter Control − Center- or Edge-Alignment of PWM Channels − Emergency PWM Channel Shutdown With External PDPINTx Pin − Programmable Deadband (Deadtime) Prevents Shoot-Through Faults − Three Capture Units for Time-Stamping of External Events − Input Qualifier for Select Pins − On-Chip Position Encoder Interface Circuitry − Synchronized A-to-D Conversion − Designed for AC Induction, BLDC, Switched Reluctance, and Stepper Motor Control − Applicable for Multiple Motor and/or Converter Control D D D D D D D D D D D D D D External Memory Interface (LF2407A) − 192K Words x 16 Bits of Total Memory: 64K Program, 64K Data, 64K I/O Watchdog (WD) Timer Module 10-Bit Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) − 8 or 16 Multiplexed Input Channels − 500-ns MIN Conversion Time − Selectable Twin 8-State Sequencers Triggered by Two Event Managers Controller Area Network (CAN) 2.0B Module (LF2407A, 2406A, 2403A) Serial Communications Interface (SCI) 16-Bit Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) (LF2407A, 2406A, LC2404A, 2403A) Phase-Locked-Loop (PLL)-Based Clock Generation Up to 40 Individually Programmable, Multiplexed General-Purpose Input / Output (GPIO) Pins Up to Five External Interrupts (Power Drive Protection, Reset, Two Maskable Interrupts) Power Management: − Three Power-Down Modes − Ability to Power Down Each Peripheral Independently Real-Time JTAG-Compliant Scan-Based Emulation, IEEE Standard 1149.1† (JTAG) Development Tools Include: − Texas Instruments (TI) ANSI C Compiler, Assembler/ Linker, and Code Composer Studio Debugger − Evaluation Modules − Scan-Based Self-Emulation (XDS510) − Broad Third-Party Digital Motor Control Support Package Options − 144-Pin LQFP PGE (LF2407A) − 100-Pin LQFP PZ (2406A, LC2404A) − 64-Pin TQFP PAG (LF2403A, LC2403A, LC2402A) − 64-Pin QFP PG (2402A) Extended Temperature Options (A and S) − A: − 40°C to 85°C − S: − 40°C to 125°C Please be aware that an important notice concerning availability, standard warranty, and use in critical applications of Texas Instruments semiconductor products and disclaimers thereto appears at the end of this data sheet. Code Composer Studio and XDS510 are trademarks of Texas Instruments. Other trademarks are the property of their respective owners. † IEEE Standard 1149.1−1990, IEEE Standard Test-Access Port; however, boundary scan is not supported in this device family. Copyright 2005, Texas Instruments Incorporated PRODUCTION DATA information is current as of publication date. Products conform to specifications per the terms of Texas Instruments standard warranty. Production processing does not necessarily include testing of all parameters. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 1 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 Table of Contents Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 TMS320x240xA Device Summary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 Functional Block Diagram of the 2407A DSP Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 Pinouts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 Pin Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 Memory Maps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21 Peripheral Memory Map of the 2407A/2406A . . . . . . . 29 Device Reset and Interrupts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 30 DSP CPU Core . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 TMS320x240xA Instruction Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Scan-Based Emulation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34 Functional Block Diagram of the 2407A DSP CPU . . 35 Internal Memory . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42 Peripherals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Event Manager Modules (EVA, EVB) . . . . . . . . . . . . 45 Enhanced Analog-to-Digital Converter (ADC) Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49 Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Module . . . . 53 2 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 Controller Area Network (CAN) Module . . . . . . . . . . 51 Serial Peripheral Interface (SPI) Module . . . . . . . . . . 55 PLL-Based Clock Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57 Digital I/O and Shared Pin Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60 External Memory Interface (LF2407A) . . . . . . . . . . . . 64 Watchdog (WD) Timer Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65 Development Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67 Documentation Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70 LF240xA and LC240xA Electrical Specifications Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Absolute Maximum Ratings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Recommended Operating Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71 Migrating From LF240xA (Flash) Devices to LC240xA (ROM) Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110 Migrating From 240x Devices to 240xA Devices . . . 111 Migrating From LF240x Devices to LC240xA Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112 Peripheral Register Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113 Mechanical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 REVISION HISTORY PAGE HIGHLIGHTS 1 Deleted C240 from the second bullet on the features page 16 Modified description of the signal TRST in Table 2 27 Modified the Program section of the memory map in Figure 7 58 Changed the text under external reference crystal clock option 71 Modified Note 2 in the absolute maximum ratings table 71 Added the RS signal to Group 1 in the notes on the recommended operating conditions table 77 Changed the maximum logic−low level of 0.8 to 0.4 V in the signal transition levels section 110 Added LC2403A device to Table 18 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 3 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 description The TMS320LF240xA and TMS320LC240xA devices, new members of the TMS320C24x generation of digital signal processor (DSP) controllers, are part of the TMS320C2000 platform of fixed-point DSPs. The 240xA devices offer the enhanced TMS320 DSP architectural design of the C2xx core CPU for low-cost, low-power, and high-performance processing capabilities. Several advanced peripherals, optimized for digital motor and motion control applications, have been integrated to provide a true single-chip DSP controller. While code-compatible with the existing C24x DSP controller devices, the 240xA offers increased processing performance (40 MIPS) and a higher level of peripheral integration. See the TMS320x240xA Device Summary section for device-specific features. The 240xA generation offers an array of memory sizes and different peripherals tailored to meet the specific price/performance points required by various applications. Flash devices of up to 32K words offer a cost-effective reprogrammable solution for volume production. The 240xA devices offer a password-based “code security” feature which is useful in preventing unauthorized duplication of proprietary code stored in on-chip Flash/ROM. Note that Flash-based devices contain a 256-word boot ROM to facilitate in-circuit programming. The 240xA family also includes ROM devices that are fully pin-to-pin compatible with their Flash counterparts. All 240xA devices offer at least one event manager module which has been optimized for digital motor control and power conversion applications. Capabilities of this module include center- and/or edge-aligned PWM generation, programmable deadband to prevent shoot-through faults, and synchronized analog-to-digital conversion. Devices with dual event managers enable multiple motor and/or converter control with a single 240xA DSP controller. Select EV pins have been provided with an “input-qualifier” circuitry, which minimizes inadvertent pin-triggering by glitches. The high-performance, 10-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC) has a minimum conversion time of 375 ns and offers up to 16 channels of analog input. The autosequencing capability of the ADC allows a maximum of 16 conversions to take place in a single conversion session without any CPU overhead. A serial communications interface (SCI) is integrated on all devices to provide asynchronous communication to other devices in the system. For systems requiring additional communication interfaces, the 2407A, 2406A, 2404A, and 2403A offer a 16-bit synchronous serial peripheral interface (SPI). The 2407A, 2406A, and 2403A offer a controller area network (CAN) communications module that meets 2.0B specifications. To maximize device flexibility, functional pins are also configurable as general-purpose inputs/outputs (GPIOs). To streamline development time, JTAG-compliant scan-based emulation has been integrated into all devices. This provides non-intrusive real-time capabilities required to debug digital control systems. A complete suite of code-generation tools from C compilers to the industry-standard Code Composer Studio debugger supports this family. Numerous third-party developers not only offer device-level development tools, but also system-level design and development support. TMS320C24x, TMS320C2000, TMS320, and C24x are trademarks of Texas Instruments. 4 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 TMS320x240xA device summary Note that throughout this data sheet, 240xA is used as a generic name for the LF240xA/LC240xA generation of devices. Table 1. Hardware Features of 240xA Devices LF2407A LF2406A LF2403A LF2402A LC2406A LC2404A LC2403A C2xx DSP Core FEATURE Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Instruction Cycle 25 ns 25 ns 25 ns 25 ns 25 ns 25 ns 25 ns 25 ns MIPS (40 MHz) LC2402A 40 MIPS 40 MIPS 40 MIPS 40 MIPS 40 MIPS 40 MIPS 40 MIPS 40 MIPS Dual-Access RAM (DARAM) 544 544 544 544 544 544 544 544 Single-Access RAM (SARAM) 2K 2K 512 512 2K 1K 512 — 32K 32K 16K 8K — — — — — — — — 32K 16K 16K 6K Code Security for On-Chip Flash/ROM Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Boot ROM Yes Yes Yes Yes — — — — External Memory Interface Yes — — — — — — — Event Managers A and B (EVA and EVB) EVA, EVB EVA, EVB EVA EVA EVA, EVB EVA, EVB EVA EVA RAM (16-bit (16 bit word) 3.3-V On-chip Flash (16-bit word) (4 sectors: 4K, 12K, 12K, 4K) On-chip ROM (16-bit word) S General-Purpose (GP) Timers S Compare (CMP)/PWM S 4 4 2 2 4 4 2 2 12/16 12/16 6/8 6/8 12/16 12/16 6/8 6/8 Capture (CAP)/QEP 6/4 6/4 3/2 3/2 6/4 6/4 3/2 3/2 S Input qualifier circuitry on PDPINTx, CAPx, QEPx, XINT1/2, and ADCSOC pins Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes S Status of PDPINTx pin reflected in COMCONx register Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Watchdog Timer Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 10-Bit ADC Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 16 16 8 8 16 16 8 8 500 ns S Channels S Conversion Time (minimum) 500 ns 500 ns 500 ns 500 ns 500 ns 500 ns 500 ns SPI Yes Yes Yes — Yes Yes Yes — SCI Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes CAN Yes Yes Yes — Yes — Yes — Digital I/O Pins (Shared) 41 41 21 21 41 41 21 21 External Interrupts Supply Voltage Packaging Product Status: Product Preview (PP) Advance Information (AI) Production Data (PD) 5 5 3 3 5 5 3 3 3.3 V 3.3 V 3.3 V 3.3 V 3.3 V 3.3 V 3.3 V 3.3 V 144-pin PGE 100-pin PZ 64-pin PAG 64-pin PG 100-pin PZ 100-pin PZ 64-pin PAG 64-pin PG, PAG PD PD PD PD PD PD PD PD Denotes features that are different/new compared to 240x devices. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 5 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 functional block diagram of the 2407A DSP controller PLLF PLLVCCA DARAM (B0) 256 Words XINT1/IOPA2 RS PLL Clock XTAL1/CLKIN CLKOUT/IOPE0 XTAL2 TMS2 BIO/IOPC1 MP/MC BOOT_EN/XF C2xx DSP Core DARAM (B1) 256 Words VDD (3.3 V) VSS 10-Bit ADC (With Twin Autosequencer) DARAM (B2) 32 Words ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ SCI SARAM (2K Words) SPI TP1 TP2 VCCP(5V) A0−A15 D0−D15 PS, DS, IS R/W RD READY STRB WE ENA_144 VIS_OE W/R / IOPC0 PDPINTA CAP1/QEP1/IOPA3 CAP2/QEP2/IOPA4 CAP3/IOPA5 PWM1/IOPA6 PWM2/IOPA7 PWM3/IOPB0 PWM4/IOPB1 PWM5/IOPB2 PWM6/IOPB3 T1PWM/T1CMP/IOPB4 T2PWM/T2CMP/IOPB5 TDIRA/IOPB6 TCLKINA/IOPB7 ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ 6 PLLF2 Flash/ROM (32K Words: 4K/12K/12K/4K) CAN External Memory Interface JTAG Port D 3 × Capture Input D 6 × Compare/PWM Output D 2 × GP Timers/PWM VSSA VREFHI VREFLO XINT2/ADCSOC/IOPD0 SCITXD/IOPA0 SCIRXD/IOPA1 SPISIMO/IOPC2 SPISOMI/IOPC3 SPICLK/IOPC4 SPISTE/IOPC5 CANTX/IOPC6 CANRX/IOPC7 WD Digital I/O (Shared With Other Pins) Event Manager A ADCIN00−ADCIN07 ADCIN08−ADCIN15 VCCA Event Manager B D 3 × Capture Input D 6 × Compare/PWM Output D 2 × GP Timers/PWM Port A(0−7) IOPA[0:7] Port B(0−7) IOPB[0:7] Port C(0−7) IOPC[0:7] Port D(0) IOPD[0] Port E(0−7) IOPE[0:7] Port F(0−6) IOPF[0:6] TRST TDO TDI TMS TCK EMU0 EMU1 PDPINTB CAP4/QEP3/IOPE7 CAP5/QEP4/IOPF0 CAP6/IOPF1 PWM7/IOPE1 PWM8/IOPE2 PWM9/IOPE3 PWM10/IOPE4 PWM11/IOPE5 PWM12/IOPE6 T3PWM/T3CMP/IOPF2 T4PWM/T4CMP/IOPF3 TDIRB/IOPF4 TCLKINB/IOPF5 Indicates optional modules. The memory size and peripheral selection of these modules change for different 240xA devices. See Table 1 for device-specific details. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pinouts † ‡ ADCIN08 ADCIN00 ADCIN09 ADCIN01 ADCIN10 113 112 111 110 109 V CCA VREFHI VREFLO 114 115 116 BIO/ IOPC1 MP/MC V SSA 118 117 READY 119 ENA_144 121 BOOT_EN/XF ‡ XTAL1/CLKIN 122 120 XTAL2 123 130 124 IOPF6 D1 VDD 131 TCLKINB/ IOPF5 V SSO D2 132 125 RS 133 D0 D3 134 126 TCK 135 V SS D4 136 127 PDPINTB 137 128 D5 138 129 V SSO TDI 139 TDO VDDO 142 140 D6 143 141 TMS 144 PGE PACKAGE† (TOP VIEW) TRST 1 108 ADCIN11 TDIRB/IOPF4 2 107 ADCIN02 VSSO 3 106 ADCIN12 VDDO 4 105 ADCIN03 D7 5 104 ADCIN13 T4PWM/T4CMP/IOPF3 6 103 ADCIN04 PDPINTA 7 102 ADCIN05 T3PWM/T3CMP/IOPF2 8 101 ADCIN14 D8 9 100 ADCIN06 PLLF2 10 99 ADCIN07 PLLF 11 98 ADCIN15 PLLVCCA 12 97 VIS_OE D9 13 96 STRB TDIRA/IOPB6 14 95 VDDO D10 15 94 VSSO T1PWM/T1CMP/IOPB4 16 93 RD 92 R/W 91 EMU1/OFF D11 17 T2PWM/T2CMP/IOPB5 18 W/R/IOPC0 19 90 EMU0 D12 20 89 WE XINT2/ADCSOC/IOPD0 21 88 CAP4/QEP3/IOPE7 D13 22 87 DS XINT1/IOPA2 23 86 VDD D14 24 85 VSS SCITXD/IOPA0 25 84 PS SCIRXD/IOPA1 26 83 CAP1/QEP1/IOPA3 D15 27 82 IS VSS 28 81 CAP5/QEP4/IOPF0 VDD 29 80 A0 SPISIMO/IOPC2 30 79 CAP2/QEP2/IOPA4 A15 31 78 A1 SPISOMI/IOPC3 32 77 VDDO SPISTE/IOPC5 33 76 VSSO A14 34 75 CAP3/IOPA5 SPICLK/IOPC4 35 74 A2 TMS2 36 73 CLKOUT/IOPE0 69 70 71 72 A3 CANTX/ IOPC6 67 VDDO 68 66 A4 65 CAP6/ IOPF1 CANRX/ IOPC7 64 A5 PWM7/ IOPE1 V SSO 60 TP1 63 59 PWM9/ IOPE3 TP2 58 62 57 A7 V CCP 61 56 PWM1/ IOPA6 A6 PWM8/ IOPE2 55 PWM10/ IOPE4 48 A10 V SS 54 47 PWM4/ IOPB1 PWM2/ IOPA7 46 PWM11/ IOPE5 53 45 A11 52 44 A8 43 A12 PWM5/ IOPB2 PWM3/ IOPB0 42 51 41 VDDO A9 40 PWM6/ IOPB3 V SSO 50 39 A13 VDD 38 PWM12/ IOPE6 49 37 TCLKINA/ IOPB7 TMS320LF2407A PGE Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. BOOT_EN is available only on Flash devices. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 7 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pinouts (continued) ADCIN11 ADCIN02 ADCIN12 ADCIN03 ADCIN13 ADCIN04 ADCIN05 ADCIN14 ADCIN06 ADCIN07 ADCIN15 V DDO V SSO EMU1/ OFF EMU0 CAP4/QEP3/ IOPE7 V DD V SS CAP1/QEP1/ IOPA3 CAP5/QEP4/ IOPF0 CAP2/QEP2/ IOPA4 V DDO V SSO CAP3/ IOPA5 CLKOUT/IOPE0 PZ PACKAGE† ( TOP VIEW ) 75 74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 ADCIN10 ADCIN01 ADCIN09 ADCIN00 ADCIN08 VREFLO VREFHI VCCA VSSA BIO/IOPC1 BOOT_EN/XF§ XTAL1/CLKIN XTAL2 TCLKINB/IOPF5 VSS VDD 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 TMS320LC2404A PZ 39 TMS320LC2406A PZ 38 37 TMS320LF2406A PZ 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 TRST TDIRB/ IOPF4 V SSO V DDO T4PWM/T4CMP/ IOPF3 PDPINTA T3PWM/T3CMP/ IOPF2 PLLF2 PLLF PLLVCCA TDIRA/ IOPB6 T1PWM/T1CMP/ IOPB4 T2PWM/T2CMP/ IOPB5 IOPC0 XINT2/ADCSOC/ IOPD0 XINT1/ IOPA2 SCITXD/ IOPA0 SCIRXD/ IOPA1 V SS V DD SPISIMO/IOPC2 SPISOMI/ IOPC3 SPISTE/ IOPC5 SPICLK/ IOPC4 TMS2 IOPF6 RS TCK PDPINTB TDI VSSO VDDO TDO TMS 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. CANTX and CANRX are not available on LC2404A devices. § BOOT_EN is available only on Flash devices. ¶ On the ROM devices (LC240xA), V CCP is a No Connect (NC). ‡ 8 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 CANTX/IOPC6‡ CANRX/IOPC7‡ CAP6/IOPF1 VDDO VSSO PWM7/IOPE1 TP2 PWM8/IOPE2 TP1 PWM9/IOPE3 VCCP¶ PWM1/IOPA6 PWM10/IOPE4 PWM2/IOPA7 PWM3/IOPB0 VDD VSS PWM4/IOPB1 PWM11/IOPE5 PWM5/IOPB2 VDDO VSSO PWM6/IOPB3 PWM12/IOPE6 TCLKINA/IOPB7 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pinouts (continued) TMS2 SPICLK/IOPC4 SPISOMI/IOPC3 SPISIMO/IOPC2 SCIRXD/IOPA1 SCITXD/IOPA0 XINT2/ADCSOC/IOPD0 T2PWM/T2CMP/IOPB5 T1PWM/T1CMP/IOPB4 PLLV CCA PLLF PLLF2 PDPINTA VDDO VSSO TRST PAG PACKAGE†‡ (TOP VIEW) 48 47 46 45 44 4342 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 TMS320LF2403A PAG TMS320LC2403A PAG TMS320LC2402A PAG TMS TDO TDI TCK RS VDD VSS XTAL2 XTAL1/CLKIN BOOT_EN/XF§ VSSA VCCA VREFHI VREFLO ADCIN00 ADCIN01 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 CLKOUT/IOPE0 CAP3/IOPA5 CAP2/QEP2/IOPA4 CAP1/QEP1/IOPA3 VSS VDD 1 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 EMU0 EMU1/ OFF VSSO VDDO ADCIN07 ADCIN06 ADCIN05 ADCIN04 ADCIN03 ADCIN02 TCLKINA/IOPB7 PWM6/IOPB3 VSSO VDDO PWM5/IOPB2 PWM4/IOPB1 VSS VDD PWM3/IOPB0 PWM2/IOPA7 PWM1/IOPA6 VCCP¶ TP1 TP2 CANRX/IOPC7 CANTX/IOPC6 † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. For LC2402A, the following pins are different from what is shown: Pin 45: IOPC2 Pin 46: IOPC3 Pin 47: IOPC4 Pin 63: IOPC7 Pin 64: IOPC6 § BOOT_EN is available only on flash devices. ¶ On the ROM devices (LC240xA), V CCP is a No Connect (NC). ‡ POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 9 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pinouts (continued) TRST PDPINTA VDDO VSSO PLLF PLLF2 VSSO PWM6/ IOPB3 TCLKINA/ IOPB7 TMS2 IOPC4 IOPC3 IOPC2 SCIRXD/ IOPA1 SCITXD/ IOPA0 XINT2/ADCSOC/ IOPD0 T2PWM/T2CMP/ IOPB5 T1PWM/T1CMP/ IOPB4 PLLV CCA PG PACKAGE† (TOP VIEW) 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 VDDO PWM5/IOPB2 PWM4/IOPB1 VSS VDD PWM3/IOPB0 PWM2/IOPA7 PWM1/IOPA6 VCCP§ TP1 TP2 IOPC7 IOPC6 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 TMS320LC2402A PG TMS320LF2402A PG CLKOUT /IOPE0 CAP3/IOPA5 CAP2/QEP2/ IOPA4 CAP1/QEP1/ IOPA3 VSS VDD EMU0 EMU1/ OFF VSSO VDDO ADCIN07 ADCIN06 ADCIN05 ADCIN04 ADCIN03 ADCIN02 ADCIN01 ADCIN00 V REFLO 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1718 19 † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. BOOT_EN is available only on Flash devices. § On the ROM devices (LC240xA), V CCP is a No Connect (NC). ‡ 10 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 TMS TDO TDI TCK RS VDD VSS XTAL2 XTAL1/CLKIN BOOT_EN/XF‡ VSSA VCCA VREFHI TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pin functions The TMS320LF2407A device is the superset of all the 240xA devices. All signals are available on the 2407A device. Table 2 lists the signals available in the 240xA generation of devices. Table 2. LF240xA and LC240xA Pin List and Package Options†‡ PIN NAME LF2407A (144-PGE) 2406A (100-PZ) LC2404A (100-PZ) 2403A, LC2402A (64-PAG) and 2402A (64-PG) DESCRIPTION EVENT MANAGER A (EVA) CAP1/QEP1/IOPA3 83 57 57 4 Capture input #1/quadrature encoder pulse input #1 (EVA) or GPIO (↑) CAP2/QEP2/IOPA4 79 55 55 3 Capture input #2/quadrature encoder pulse input #2 (EVA) or GPIO (↑) CAP3/IOPA5 75 52 52 2 Capture input #3 (EVA) or GPIO (↑) PWM1/IOPA6 56 39 39 59 Compare/PWM output pin #1 (EVA) or GPIO (↑) PWM2/IOPA7 54 37 37 58 Compare/PWM output pin #2 (EVA) or GPIO (↑) PWM3/IOPB0 52 36 36 57 Compare/PWM output pin #3 (EVA) or GPIO (↑) PWM4/IOPB1 47 33 33 54 Compare/PWM output pin #4 (EVA) or GPIO (↑) PWM5/IOPB2 44 31 31 53 Compare/PWM output pin #5 (EVA) or GPIO (↑) PWM6/IOPB3 40 28 28 50 Compare/PWM output pin #6 (EVA) or GPIO (↑) T1PWM/T1CMP/IOPB4 16 12 12 40 Timer 1 compare output (EVA) or GPIO (↑) T2PWM/T2CMP/IOPB5 18 13 13 41 Timer 2 compare output (EVA) or GPIO (↑) TDIRA/IOPB6 14 11 11 TCLKINA/IOPB7 37 26 26 Counting direction for general-purpose (GP) timer (EVA) or GPIO. If TDIRA = 1, upward counting is selected. If TDIRA = 0, downward counting is selected. (↑) 49 External clock input for GP timer (EVA) or GPIO. Note that the timer can also use the internal device clock. (↑) EVENT MANAGER B (EVB) CAP4/QEP3/IOPE7 88 60 60 Capture input #4/quadrature encoder pulse input #3 (EVB) or GPIO (↑) CAP5/QEP4/IOPF0 81 56 56 Capture input #5/quadrature encoder pulse input #4 (EVB) or GPIO (↑) CAP6/IOPF1 69 48 48 Capture input #6 (EVB) or GPIO (↑) PWM7/IOPE1 65 45 45 Compare/PWM output pin #7 (EVB) or GPIO (↑) PWM8/IOPE2 62 43 43 Compare/PWM output pin #8 (EVB) or GPIO (↑) PWM9/IOPE3 59 41 41 Compare/PWM output pin #9 (EVB) or GPIO (↑) PWM10/IOPE4 55 38 38 Compare/PWM output pin #10 (EVB) or GPIO (↑) PWM11/IOPE5 46 32 32 Compare/PWM output pin #11 (EVB) or GPIO (↑) PWM12/IOPE6 38 27 27 Compare/PWM output pin #12 (EVB) or GPIO (↑) † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. ‡ GPIO − General-purpose input/output pin. All GPIOs come up as input after reset. § It is highly recommended that V CCA be isolated from the digital supply voltage (and VSSA from digital ground) to maintain the specified accuracy and improve the noise immunity of the ADC. ¶ Only when all of the following conditions are met: EMU1/OFF is low, TRST is low, and EMU0 is high # No power supply pin (V , V DD DDO, VSS, or VSSO) should be left unconnected. All power supply pins must be connected appropriately for proper device operation. LEGEND: ↑ − Internal pullup ↓ − Internal pulldown (Typical active pullup/pulldown value is ±16 µA.) POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 11 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pin functions (continued) Table 2. LF240xA and LC240xA Pin List and Package Options†‡ (Continued) PIN NAME LF2407A (144-PGE) 2406A (100-PZ) LC2404A (100-PZ) 2403A, LC2402A (64-PAG) and 2402A (64-PG) DESCRIPTION EVENT MANAGER B (EVB) (CONTINUED) T3PWM/T3CMP/IOPF2 8 7 7 Timer 3 compare output (EVB) or GPIO (↑) T4PWM/T4CMP/IOPF3 6 5 5 Timer 4 compare output (EVB) or GPIO (↑) TDIRB/IOPF4 2 2 2 Counting direction for general-purpose (GP) timer (EVB) or GPIO. If TDIRB = 1, upward counting is selected. If TDIRB = 0, downward counting is selected. (↑) TCLKINB/IOPF5 126 89 89 External clock input for GP timer (EVB) or GPIO. Note that the timer can also use the internal device clock. (↑) ADCIN00 112 79 79 18 Analog input #0 to the ADC ADCIN01 110 77 77 17 Analog input #1 to the ADC ADCIN02 107 74 74 16 Analog input #2 to the ADC ADCIN03 105 72 72 15 Analog input #3 to the ADC ADCIN04 103 70 70 14 Analog input #4 to the ADC ADCIN05 102 69 69 13 Analog input #5 to the ADC ADCIN06 100 67 67 12 Analog input #6 to the ADC ADCIN07 99 66 66 11 Analog input #7 to the ADC ADCIN08 113 80 80 Analog input #8 to the ADC ADCIN09 111 78 78 Analog input #9 to the ADC ADCIN10 109 76 76 Analog input #10 to the ADC ADCIN11 108 75 75 Analog input #11 to the ADC ADCIN12 106 73 73 Analog input #12 to the ADC ADCIN13 104 71 71 Analog input #13 to the ADC ADCIN14 101 68 68 Analog input #14 to the ADC ADCIN15 98 65 65 VREFHI 115 82 82 20 ADC analog high-voltage reference input VREFLO 114 81 81 19 ADC analog low-voltage reference input VCCA 116 83 83 21 Analog supply voltage for ADC (3.3 V)§ VSSA 117 84 84 22 Analog ground reference for ADC ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) Analog input #15 to the ADC † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. ‡ GPIO − General-purpose input/output pin. All GPIOs come up as input after reset. § It is highly recommended that V CCA be isolated from the digital supply voltage (and VSSA from digital ground) to maintain the specified accuracy and improve the noise immunity of the ADC. ¶ Only when all of the following conditions are met: EMU1/OFF is low, TRST is low, and EMU0 is high # No power supply pin (V , V DD DDO, VSS, or VSSO) should be left unconnected. All power supply pins must be connected appropriately for proper device operation. LEGEND: ↑ − Internal pullup ↓ − Internal pulldown (Typical active pullup/pulldown value is ±16 µA.) 12 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pin functions (continued) Table 2. LF240xA and LC240xA Pin List and Package Options†‡ (Continued) LF2407A (144-PGE) PIN NAME 2406A (100-PZ) LC2404A (100-PZ) 2403A, LC2402A (64-PAG) and 2402A (64-PG) DESCRIPTION CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN), SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI), SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) CANRX 70 49 − 63 CAN receive data or GPIO (LF2403A) (↑) IOPC7 70 49 49 63 GPIO only (2402A) (↑) CANTX 72 50 − 64 CAN transmit data or GPIO (LF2403A) (↑) IOPC6 72 50 50 64 GPIO only (2402A) (↑) SCITXD/IOPA0 25 17 17 43 SCI asynchronous serial port transmit data or GPIO (↑) SCIRXD/IOPA1 26 18 18 44 SCI asynchronous serial port receive data or or GPIO (↑) SPICLK 35 24 24 47 SPI clock or GPIO (LF2403A) (↑) IOPC4 35 24 24 47 GPIO only (2402A) (↑) SPISIMO 30 21 21 45 SPI slave in, master out or GPIO (LF2403A) (↑) IOPC2 30 21 21 45 GPIO only (2402A) (↑) SPISOMI 32 22 22 46 SPI slave out, master in or GPIO (LF2403A) (↑) IOPC3 32 22 22 46 GPIO only (2402A) (↑) SPISTE 33 23 23 − IOPC5 33 23 23 − CANRX/IOPC7 CANTX/IOPC6 SPICLK/IOPC4 SPISIMO/IOPC2 SPISOMI/IOPC3 SPISTE/IOPC5 transmit enable (optional) or GPIO (↑) SPI slave transmit-enable EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS, CLOCK Device Reset (in) and Watchdog Reset (out). RS 133 93 93 28 Device reset. RS causes the device to terminate execution and to set PC = 0. When RS is brought to a high level, execution begins at location 0x0000 of program memory. This pin is driven low by the DSP when a watchdog reset occurs. During watchdog reset, the RS pin will be driven low for the watchdog reset duration of 128 CLKIN cycles. The output buffer of this pin is an open-drain with an internal pullup (20 µA, typical). It is recommended that this pin be driven by an open-drain device. (↑) PDPINTA 7 6 6 36 Power drive protection interrupt input. This interrupt, when activated, puts the PWM output pins (EVA) in the high-impedance state should motor drive/power converter abnormalities, such as overvoltage or overcurrent, etc., arise. PDPINTA is a falling-edge-sensitive interrupt. (↑) † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. GPIO − General-purpose input/output pin. All GPIOs come up as input after reset. § It is highly recommended that V CCA be isolated from the digital supply voltage (and VSSA from digital ground) to maintain the specified accuracy and improve the noise immunity of the ADC. ¶ Only when all of the following conditions are met: EMU1/OFF is low, TRST is low, and EMU0 is high # No power supply pin (V , V DD DDO, VSS, or VSSO) should be left unconnected. All power supply pins must be connected appropriately for proper device operation. LEGEND: ↑ − Internal pullup ↓ − Internal pulldown (Typical active pullup/pulldown value is ±16 µA.) ‡ POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 13 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pin functions (continued) Table 2. LF240xA and LC240xA Pin List and Package Options†‡ (Continued) LF2407A (144-PGE) PIN NAME 2406A (100-PZ) LC2404A (100-PZ) 2403A, LC2402A (64-PAG) and 2402A (64-PG) DESCRIPTION EXTERNAL INTERRUPTS, CLOCK (CONTINUED) XINT1/IOPA2 23 XINT2/ADCSOC/IOPD0 CLKOUT/IOPE0 16 21 15 73 PDPINTB 51 137 95 16 External user interrupt 1 or GPIO. Both XINT1 and XINT2 are edge-sensitive. The edge polarity is programmable. (↑) 15 42 External user interrupt 2 and ADC start of conversion or GPIO. External “start-of-conversion” input for ADC/GPIO. Both XINT1 and XINT2 are edge-sensitive. The edge polarity is programmable. (↑) 1 Clock output or GPIO. This pin outputs either the CPU clock (CLKOUT) or the watchdog clock (WDCLK). The selection is made by the CLKSRC bit (bit 14) of the system control and status register (SCSR). This pin can be used as a GPIO if not used as a clock output pin. (↑) 51 Power drive protection interrupt input. This interrupt, when activated, puts the PWM output pins (EVB) in the high-impedance state should motor drive/power converter abnormalities, such as overvoltage or overcurrent, etc., arise. PDPINTB is a falling-edge-sensitive interrupt. (↑) 95 OSCILLATOR, PLL, FLASH, BOOT, AND MISCELLANEOUS XTAL1/CLKIN 123 87 87 24 PLL oscillator input pin. Crystal input to PLL/clock source input to PLL. XTAL1/CLKIN is tied to one side of a reference crystal. XTAL2 124 88 88 25 Crystal output. PLL oscillator output pin. XTAL2 is tied to one side of a reference crystal. This pin goes in the high-impedance state when EMU1/OFF is active low. PLLVCCA 12 10 10 39 PLL supply (3.3 V) IOPF6 131 92 92 BOOT_EN 121 86 − 23 XF 121 86 86 23 11 9 9 38 General-purpose I/O (↑) BOOT_EN / XF PLLF Boot ROM enable, GPO, XF. This pin will be sampled as input (BOOT_EN) to update SCSR2.3 (BOOT_EN bit) during reset and then driven as an output signal for XF. After reset, XF is driven high. ROM devices do not have boot ROM, hence, no BOOT_EN modes. The BOOT_EN pin must be driven with a passive circuit only. (↑) PLL loop filter input 1 † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. ‡ GPIO − General-purpose input/output pin. All GPIOs come up as input after reset. § It is highly recommended that V CCA be isolated from the digital supply voltage (and VSSA from digital ground) to maintain the specified accuracy and improve the noise immunity of the ADC. ¶ Only when all of the following conditions are met: EMU1/OFF is low, TRST is low, and EMU0 is high # No power supply pin (V , V DD DDO, VSS, or VSSO) should be left unconnected. All power supply pins must be connected appropriately for proper device operation. LEGEND: ↑ − Internal pullup ↓ − Internal pulldown (Typical active pullup/pulldown value is ±16 µA.) 14 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pin functions (continued) Table 2. LF240xA and LC240xA Pin List and Package Options†‡ (Continued) PIN NAME LF2407A (144-PGE) 2406A (100-PZ) LC2404A (100-PZ) 2403A, LC2402A (64-PAG) and 2402A (64-PG) DESCRIPTION OSCILLATOR, PLL, FLASH, BOOT, AND MISCELLANEOUS (CONTINUED) PLLF2 10 8 8 37 PLL loop filter input 2 VCCP (5V) 58 40 40 60 Flash programming voltage pin. This pin must be connected to a 5-V supply for Flash programming. The Flash cannot be programmed if this pin is connected to GND. When not programming the Flash (i.e., during normal device operation), this pin can either be left connected to the 5-V supply or it can be tied to GND. This pin must not be left floating at any time. Do not use any current-limiting resistor in series with the 5-V supply on this pin. This pin is a “no connect” (NC) on ROM parts (i.e., this pin is not connected to any circuitry internal to the device). Connecting this pin to 5 V or leaving it open makes no difference on ROM parts. TP1 60 42 42 61 Test pin 1. Do not connect. TP2 63 44 44 62 Test pin 2. Do not connect. BIO/IOPC1 119 85 Branch control input. BIO is polled by the BCND pma,BIO instruction. If BIO is low, a branch is executed. If BIO is not used, it should be pulled high. This pin is configured as a branch control input by all device resets. It can be used as a GPIO, if not used as a branch control input. (↑) 85 EMULATION AND TEST EMU0 90 61 61 7 Emulator I/O #0 with internal pullup. When TRST is driven high, this pin is used as an interrupt to or from the emulator system and is defined as input/output through the JTAG scan. (↑) EMU1/OFF 91 62 62 8 Emulator pin 1. Emulator pin 1 disables all outputs. When TRST is driven high, EMU1/OFF is used as an interrupt to or from the emulator system and is defined as an input/output through the JTAG scan. When TRST is driven low, this pin is configured as OFF. EMU1/OFF, when active low, puts all output drivers in the high-impedance state. Note that OFF is used exclusively for testing and emulation purposes (not for multiprocessing applications). Therefore, for the OFF condition, the following apply: TRST = 0 EMU0 = 1 EMU1/OFF = 0 (↑) TCK 135 94 94 29 JTAG test clock with internal pullup (↑) † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. GPIO − General-purpose input/output pin. All GPIOs come up as input after reset. § It is highly recommended that V CCA be isolated from the digital supply voltage (and VSSA from digital ground) to maintain the specified accuracy and improve the noise immunity of the ADC. ¶ Only when all of the following conditions are met: EMU1/OFF is low, TRST is low, and EMU0 is high # No power supply pin (V , V DD DDO, VSS, or VSSO) should be left unconnected. All power supply pins must be connected appropriately for proper device operation. LEGEND: ↑ − Internal pullup ↓ − Internal pulldown (Typical active pullup/pulldown value is ±16 µA.) ‡ POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 15 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pin functions (continued) Table 2. LF240xA and LC240xA Pin List and Package Options†‡ (Continued) PIN NAME LF2407A (144-PGE) 2406A (100-PZ) LC2404A (100-PZ) 2403A, LC2402A (64-PAG) and 2402A (64-PG) DESCRIPTION EMULATION AND TEST (CONTINUED) TDI 139 96 96 30 JTAG test data input (TDI) with internal pullup. TDI is clocked into the selected register (instruction or data) on a rising edge of TCK. (↑) TDO 142 99 99 31 JTAG scan out, test data output (TDO). The contents of the selected register (instruction or data) is shifted out of TDO on the falling edge of TCK. (↓) TMS 144 100 100 32 JTAG test-mode select (TMS) with internal pullup. This serial control input is clocked into the TAP controller on the rising edge of TCK. (↑) 48 JTAG test-mode select 2 (TMS2) with internal pullup. This serial control input is clocked into the TAP controller on the rising edge of TCK. Used for test and emulation only. This pin can be left unconnected in user applications. If the PLL bypass mode is desired, TMS2, TMS, and TRST should be held low during reset. (↑) TMS2 36 25 25 JTAG test reset with internal pulldown. TRST, when driven high, gives the scan system control of the operations of the device. If this signal is not connected or driven low, the device operates in its functional mode, and the test reset signals are ignored. (↓) TRST 1 1 1 33 NOTE: Do not use pullup resistors on TRST; it has an internal pulldown device. TRST is an active high test pin and must be maintained low at all times during normal device operation. In a low-noise environment, TRST may be left floating. In other instances, an external pulldown resistor is highly recommended. The value of this resistor should be based on drive strength of the debugger pods applicable to the design. A 2.2-kΩ resistor generally offers adequate protection. Since this is application−specific, it is recommended that each target board be validated for proper operation of the debugger and the application. (I ↓) † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. GPIO − General-purpose input/output pin. All GPIOs come up as input after reset. § It is highly recommended that V CCA be isolated from the digital supply voltage (and VSSA from digital ground) to maintain the specified accuracy and improve the noise immunity of the ADC. ¶ Only when all of the following conditions are met: EMU1/OFF is low, TRST is low, and EMU0 is high # No power supply pin (V , V DD DDO, VSS, or VSSO) should be left unconnected. All power supply pins must be connected appropriately for proper device operation. LEGEND: ↑ − Internal pullup ↓ − Internal pulldown (Typical active pullup/pulldown value is ±16 µA.) ‡ 16 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pin functions (continued) Table 2. LF240xA and LC240xA Pin List and Package Options†‡ (Continued) LF2407A (144-PGE) PIN NAME 2406A (100-PZ) LC2404A (100-PZ) 2403A, LC2402A (64-PAG) and 2402A (64-PG) DESCRIPTION ADDRESS, DATA, AND MEMORY CONTROL SIGNALS DS 87 Data space strobe. IS, DS, and PS are always high unless low-level asserted for access to the relevant external memory space or I/O. They are placed in the high-impedance state.¶ IS 82 I/O space strobe. IS, DS, and PS are always high unless low-level asserted for access to the relevant external memory space or I/O. They are placed in the high-impedance state.¶ 84 Program space strobe. IS, DS, and PS are always high unless low-level asserted for access to the relevant external memory space or I/O. They are placed in the high-impedance state.¶ 92 Read/write qualifier signal. R/W indicates transfer direction during communication to an external device. It is normally in read mode (high), unless low level is asserted for performing a write operation. R/W is placed in the high-impedance state.¶ PS R/W W/R 19 IOPC0 19 W/R / IOPC0 RD WE STRB 14 14 Write/Read qualifier or GPIO. This is an inverted R/W signal useful for zero-wait-state memory interface. It is normally low, unless a memory write operation is performed. See Table 12, Port C section, for reset note regarding LF2406A and LF2402A. (↑) 93 Read-enable strobe. Read-select indicates an active, external read cycle. RD is active on all external program, data, and I / O reads. RD is placed in the high-impedance state.¶ 89 Write-enable strobe. The falling edge of WE indicates that the device is driving the external data bus (D15 −D0). WE is active on all external program, data, and I/O writes. WE is placed in the high-impedance state.¶ 96 External memory access strobe. STRB is always high unless asserted low to indicate an external bus cycle. STRB is active for all off-chip accesses. STRB is placed in the high-impedance state.¶ † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. GPIO − General-purpose input/output pin. All GPIOs come up as input after reset. § It is highly recommended that V CCA be isolated from the digital supply voltage (and VSSA from digital ground) to maintain the specified accuracy and improve the noise immunity of the ADC. ¶ Only when all of the following conditions are met: EMU1/OFF is low, TRST is low, and EMU0 is high # No power supply pin (V , V DD DDO, VSS, or VSSO) should be left unconnected. All power supply pins must be connected appropriately for proper device operation. LEGEND: ↑ − Internal pullup ↓ − Internal pulldown (Typical active pullup/pulldown value is ±16 µA.) ‡ POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 17 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pin functions (continued) Table 2. LF240xA and LC240xA Pin List and Package Options†‡ (Continued) PIN NAME LF2407A (144-PGE) 2406A (100-PZ) LC2404A (100-PZ) 2403A, LC2402A (64-PAG) and 2402A (64-PG) DESCRIPTION ADDRESS, DATA, AND MEMORY CONTROL SIGNALS (CONTINUED) 120 READY is pulled low to add wait states for external accesses. READY indicates that an external device is prepared for a bus transaction to be completed. If the device is not ready, it pulls the READY pin low. The processor waits one cycle and checks READY again. Note that the processor performs READY-detection if at least one software wait state is programmed. To meet the external READY timing parameters, the wait-state generator control register (WSGR) should be programmed for at least one wait state. (↑) MP/MC 118 Microprocessor/Microcomputer mode select. If this pin is low during reset, the device is put in microcomputer mode and program execution begins at 0000h of internal program memory (Flash EEPROM). A high value during reset puts the device in microprocessor mode and program execution begins at 0000h of external program memory. This line sets the MP/MC bit (bit 2 in the SCSR2 register). (↓) ENA_144 122 Active high to enable external interface signals. If pulled low, the 2407A behaves like the 2406A/2403A/2402A—i.e., it has no external memory and generates an illegal address if DS is asserted. This pin has an internal pulldown. (↓) VIS_OE 97 Visibility output enable (active when data bus is output). This pin is active (low) whenever the external data bus is driving as an output during visibility mode. Can be used by external decode logic to prevent data bus contention while running in visibility mode. A0 80 Bit 0 of the 16-bit address bus A1 78 Bit 1 of the 16-bit address bus A2 74 Bit 2 of the 16-bit address bus A3 71 Bit 3 of the 16-bit address bus A4 68 Bit 4 of the 16-bit address bus A5 64 Bit 5 of the 16-bit address bus A6 61 Bit 6 of the 16-bit address bus A7 57 Bit 7 of the 16-bit address bus A8 53 Bit 8 of the 16-bit address bus A9 51 Bit 9 of the 16-bit address bus A10 48 Bit 10 of the 16-bit address bus A11 45 Bit 11 of the 16-bit address bus READY † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. ‡ GPIO − General-purpose input/output pin. All GPIOs come up as input after reset. § It is highly recommended that V CCA be isolated from the digital supply voltage (and VSSA from digital ground) to maintain the specified accuracy and improve the noise immunity of the ADC. ¶ Only when all of the following conditions are met: EMU1/OFF is low, TRST is low, and EMU0 is high # No power supply pin (V , V DD DDO, VSS, or VSSO) should be left unconnected. All power supply pins must be connected appropriately for proper device operation. LEGEND: ↑ − Internal pullup ↓ − Internal pulldown (Typical active pullup/pulldown value is ±16 µA.) 18 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pin functions (continued) Table 2. LF240xA and LC240xA Pin List and Package Options†‡ (Continued) PIN NAME LF2407A (144-PGE) 2406A (100-PZ) LC2404A (100-PZ) 2403A, LC2402A (64-PAG) and 2402A (64-PG) DESCRIPTION ADDRESS, DATA, AND MEMORY CONTROL SIGNALS (CONTINUED) A12 43 Bit 12 of the 16-bit address bus A13 39 Bit 13 of the 16-bit address bus A14 34 Bit 14 of the 16-bit address bus A15 31 Bit 15 of the 16-bit address bus D0 127 Bit 0 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D1 130 Bit 1 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D2 132 Bit 2 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D3 134 Bit 3 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D4 136 Bit 4 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D5 138 Bit 5 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D6 143 Bit 6 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D7 5 Bit 7 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D8 9 Bit 8 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D9 13 Bit 9 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D10 15 Bit 10 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D11 17 Bit 11 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D12 20 Bit 12 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D13 22 Bit 13 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D14 24 Bit 14 of 16-bit data bus (↑) D15 27 Bit 15 of 16-bit data bus (↑) POWER SUPPLY VDD# VDDO# 29 20 20 6 50 35 35 27 86 59 59 56 129 91 91 4 4 4 10 42 30 30 35 67 47 47 52 77 54 54 95 64 64 141 98 98 Core supply +3.3 3 3 V. V Digital logic supply voltage. voltage I/O buffer supply +3.3 V. Digital logic and buffer supply voltage. † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. ‡ GPIO − General-purpose input/output pin. All GPIOs come up as input after reset. § It is highly recommended that V CCA be isolated from the digital supply voltage (and VSSA from digital ground) to maintain the specified accuracy and improve the noise immunity of the ADC. ¶ Only when all of the following conditions are met: EMU1/OFF is low, TRST is low, and EMU0 is high # No power supply pin (V , V DD DDO, VSS, or VSSO) should be left unconnected. All power supply pins must be connected appropriately for proper device operation. LEGEND: ↑ − Internal pullup ↓ − Internal pulldown (Typical active pullup/pulldown value is ±16 µA.) POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 19 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 pin functions (continued) Table 2. LF240xA and LC240xA Pin List and Package Options†‡ (Continued) PIN NAME LF2407A (144-PGE) 2406A (100-PZ) LC2404A (100-PZ) 2403A, LC2402A (64-PAG) and 2402A (64-PG) DESCRIPTION POWER SUPPLY (CONTINUED) VSS# VSSO# 28 19 19 5 49 34 34 26 85 58 58 55 128 90 90 3 3 3 9 41 29 29 34 66 46 46 51 76 53 53 94 63 63 125 97 97 Core ground. ground Digital logic ground reference reference. I/O buffer ground. Digital logic and buffer ground reference. 140 † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin function after reset. GPIO − General-purpose input/output pin. All GPIOs come up as input after reset. § It is highly recommended that V CCA be isolated from the digital supply voltage (and VSSA from digital ground) to maintain the specified accuracy and improve the noise immunity of the ADC. ¶ Only when all of the following conditions are met: EMU1/OFF is low, TRST is low, and EMU0 is high # No power supply pin (V , V DD DDO, VSS, or VSSO) should be left unconnected. All power supply pins must be connected appropriately for proper device operation. LEGEND: ↑ − Internal pullup ↓ − Internal pulldown (Typical active pullup/pulldown value is ±16 µA.) ‡ 20 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 memory maps Hex 0000 Hex 0000 Program Flash Sector 0 (4K) 005F 0060 007F 0080 00FF 0100 01FF 0200 Interrupt Vectors (0000−003Fh) Reserved † (0040−0043h) User code begins at 0044h 0FFF 1000 02FF 0300 03FF 0400 04FF 0500 07FF 0800 Flash Sector 1 (12K) 3FFF 4000 Flash Sector 2 (12K) 0FFF 1000 Data Hex 0000 Memory-Mapped Registers/Reserved Addresses I/O ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ On-Chip DARAM B2 Illegal Reserved On-Chip DARAM (B0)§ (CNF = 0) Reserved (CNF = 1) ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ On-Chip DARAM (B1)¶ Reserved Illegal External SARAM (2K) Internal (DON = 1) Reserved (DON=0) Illegal 6FFF 7000 6FFF 7000 Flash Sector 3 (4K) 7FFF 8000 87FF 8800 ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ SARAM (2K) Internal (PON = 1) External (PON=0) 7FFF 8000 Peripheral Memory-Mapped Registers (System, WD, ADC, SCI, SPI, CAN, I/O, Interrupts) FEFF FF00 External FF0E External FF0F FDFF FE00 FEFF FF00 FFFF FF10 Reserved‡ (CNF = 1) External (CNF = 0) FFFE On-Chip DARAM (B0)‡ (CNF = 1) External (CNF = 0) FFFF On-Chip Flash Memory (Sectored) − if MP/MC = 0 External Program Memory − if MP/MC = 1 ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Reserved Flash Control Mode Register Reserved Wait-State Generator Control Register (On-Chip) FFFF SARAM (See Table 1 for details.) Reserved or Illegal NOTE A: Boot ROM: If the boot ROM is enabled, then addresses 0000−00FF in the program space will be occupied by boot ROM. Addresses 0040h−0043h in on-chip program memory are reserved for code security passwords. ‡ When CNF = 1, addresses FE00h−FEFFh and FF00h−FFFFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in program-memory space. For example, a write to FE00h has the same effect as a write to FF00h. For simplicity, addresses FE00h−FEFFh are referred to as reserved when CNF = 1. § When CNF = 0, addresses 0100h−01FFh and 0200h−02FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0100h has the same effect as a write to 0200h. For simplicity, addresses 0100h−01FFh are referred to as reserved. ¶ Addresses 0300h−03FFh and 0400h−04FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B1) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0400h has the same effect as a write to 0300h. For simplicity, addresses 0400h−04FFh are referred to as reserved. † Figure 1. TMS320LF2407A Memory Map POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 21 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 memory maps (continued) Hex 0000 Hex 0000 Program Flash Sector 0 (4K) 005F 0060 007F 0080 00FF 0100 01FF 0200 User code begins at 0044h 0FFF 1000 02FF 0300 03FF 0400 04FF 0500 07FF 0800 Flash Sector 1 (12K) 3FFF 4000 Flash Sector 2 (12K) 6FFF 7000 Flash Sector 3 (4K) ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ SARAM (2K) Internal (PON = 1) Reserved (PON=0) Illegal FDFF FE00 Reserved‡ FEFF FF00 On-Chip DARAM (B0)‡ (CNF = 1) External (CNF = 0) FFFF On-Chip DARAM B2 Illegal Reserved On-Chip DARAM (B0)§ (CNF = 0) Reserved (CNF = 1) ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ 0FFF 1000 6FFF 7000 87FF 8800 Memory-Mapped Registers/Reserved Addresses 7FFF 8000 On-Chip DARAM (B1)¶ Reserved Illegal SARAM (2K) Internal (DON = 1) Reserved (DON = 0) Illegal Peripheral Memory-Mapped Registers (System, WD, ADC, SCI, SPI, CAN, I/O, Interrupts) FF0E Illegal I/O Illegal FEFF FF00 FF0F FF10 FFFE Reserved Flash Control Mode Register Reserved Reserved FFFF FFFF On-Chip Flash Memory (Sectored) ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Hex 0000 ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Interrupt Vectors (0000−003Fh) Reserved † (0040−0043h) 7FFF 8000 Data SARAM (See Table 1 for details.) Reserved or Illegal NOTE A: Boot ROM: If the boot ROM is enabled, then addresses 0000−00FF in the program space will be occupied by boot ROM. † Addresses 0040h−0043h in program memory are reserved for code security passwords. ‡ When CNF = 1, addresses FE00h−FEFFh and FF00h−FFFFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in program-memory space. For example, a write to FE00h has the same effect as a write to FF00h. For simplicity, addresses FE00h−FEFFh are referred to as reserved. § When CNF = 0, addresses 0100h−01FFh and 0200h−02FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0100h has the same effect as a write to 0200h. For simplicity, addresses 0100h−01FFh are referred to as reserved. ¶ Addresses 0300h−03FFh and 0400h−04FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B1) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0400h has the same effect as a write to 0300h. For simplicity, addresses 0400h−04FFh are referred to as reserved. Figure 2. TMS320LF2406A Memory Map 22 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 memory maps (continued) Hex Flash Sector 0 (4K) Interrupt Vectors (0000−003Fh) Reserved † (0040−0043h) 0000 0FFF 1000 3FFF 4000 Hex 0000 Program 005F 0060 007F 0080 00FF 0100 01FF 0200 User code begins at 0044h ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Flash Sector 1 (12K) 02FF 0300 03FF 0400 04FF 0500 07FF 0800 Reserved 7FFF 8000 81FF 8200 87FF 8800 09FF 0A00 SARAM (512 words) Internal (PON = 1) Reserved (PON = 0) 0FFF 1000 6FFF 7000 Reserved 7FFF 8000 Illegal Hex 0000 Memory-Mapped Registers/Reserved Addresses ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ On-Chip DARAM B2 Illegal Reserved On-Chip DARAM (B0)§ (CNF = 0) Reserved (CNF = 1) ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ On-Chip DARAM (B1)¶ Reserved Illegal SARAM (512 words) Internal (DON = 1) Reserved (DON = 0) Reserved Illegal Peripheral Memory-Mapped Registers (System, WD, ADC, SCI, I/O, Interrupts) FEFF FF00 FF0E Illegal FDFF FE00 FF0F FF10 Reserved‡ FEFF FF00 Data FFFE On-Chip DARAM (B0)‡ (CNF = 1) Reserved (CNF = 0) FFFF FFFF On-Chip Flash Memory (Sectored) FFFF ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ I/O Illegal Reserved Flash Control Mode Register Reserved Reserved SARAM (See Table 1 for details.) Reserved or Illegal NOTE A: Boot ROM: If the boot ROM is enabled, then addresses 0000−00FF in the program space will be occupied by boot ROM. † Addresses 0040h−0043h in program memory are reserved for code security passwords. ‡ When CNF = 1, addresses FE00h−FEFFh and FF00h−FFFFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in program-memory space. For example, a write to FE00h has the same effect as a write to FF00h. For simplicity, addresses FE00h−FEFFh are referred to as reserved. § When CNF = 0, addresses 0100h−01FFh and 0200h−02FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0100h has the same effect as a write to 0200h. For simplicity, addresses 0100h−01FFh are referred to as reserved. ¶ Addresses 0300h−03FFh and 0400h−04FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B1) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0400h has the same effect as a write to 0300h. For simplicity, addresses 0400h−04FFh are referred to as reserved. Figure 3. TMS320LF2403A Memory Map POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 23 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 memory maps (continued) Hex 0000 0FFF 1000 1FFF 2000 Flash Sector 0 (4K) Interrupt Vectors (0000−003Fh) Reserved † (0040−0043h) User code begins at 0044h ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Flash Sector 1 (4K) Reserved 7FFF 8000 81FF 8200 87FF 8800 SARAM (512 words) Internal (PON = 1) Reserved (PON = 0) Reserved Illegal FDFF FE00 Reserved‡ FEFF FF00 ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ Hex 0000 Program On-Chip DARAM (B0)‡ (CNF = 1) Reserved (CNF = 0) 005F 0060 007F 0080 00FF 0100 01FF 0200 02FF 0300 03FF 0400 04FF 0500 07FF 0800 Data Memory-Mapped Registers/Reserved Addresses Illegal Reserved On-Chip DARAM (B0)§ (CNF = 0) Reserved (CNF = 1) On-Chip DARAM (B1)¶ Reserved Illegal Illegal SARAM (512 words) Internal (DON = 1) Reserved (DON = 0) Reserved 0FFF 1000 7FFF 8000 I/O On-Chip DARAM B2 09FF 0A00 6FFF 7000 Hex 0000 Illegal Peripheral Memory-Mapped Registers (System, WD, ADC, SCI, I/O, Interrupts) FEFF FF00 FF0E Illegal FF0F FF10 FFFE Reserved Flash Control Mode Register Reserved Reserved FFFF FFFF FFFF On-Chip Flash Memory (Sectored) SARAM (See Table 1 for details.) Reserved or Illegal NOTE A: Boot ROM: If the boot ROM is enabled, then addresses 0000−00FF in the program space will be occupied by boot ROM. † Addresses 0040h−0043h in program memory are reserved for code security passwords. ‡ When CNF = 1, addresses FE00h−FEFFh and FF00h−FFFFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in program-memory space. For example, a write to FE00h has the same effect as a write to FF00h. For simplicity, addresses FE00h−FEFFh are referred to as reserved. § When CNF = 0, addresses 0100h−01FFh and 0200h−02FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0100h has the same effect as a write to 0200h. For simplicity, addresses 0100h−01FFh are referred to as reserved. ¶ Addresses 0300h−03FFh and 0400h−04FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B1) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0400h has the same effect as a write to 0300h. For simplicity, addresses 0400h−04FFh are referred to as reserved. Figure 4. TMS320LF2402A Memory Map 24 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 memory maps (continued) Hex 0000 Program On-Chip ROM (32K) Interrupt Vectors (0000−003Fh) Reserved † (0040−0043h) User code begins at 0044h 7FBF 7FC0 ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Reserved 7FFF 8000 87FF 8800 SARAM (2K) Internal (PON = 1) Reserved (PON = 0) Reserved Illegal FDFF FE00 Reserved‡ FEFF FF00 On-Chip DARAM (B0)‡ (CNF = 1) Reserved (CNF = 0) Hex 0000 Data Memory-Mapped Registers/Reserved Addresses ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ 005F 0060 007F 0080 00FF 0100 01FF 0200 02FF 0300 03FF 0400 04FF 0500 07FF 0800 On-Chip DARAM B2 Illegal Reserved On-Chip DARAM (B0)§ (CNF = 0) Reserved (CNF = 1) ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ On-Chip DARAM (B1)¶ Reserved Illegal SARAM (2K) Internal (DON = 1) Reserved (DON = 0) 0FFF 1000 6FFF 7000 Illegal Peripheral Memory-Mapped Registers (System, WD, ADC, SCI, SPI, CAN, I/O, Interrupts) ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ 7FFF 8000 Illegal FFFF FFFF On-Chip ROM memory SARAM (See Table 1 for details.) Reserved or Illegal † Addresses 0040h−0043h in program memory are reserved for code security passwords. When CNF = 1, addresses FE00h−FEFFh and FF00h−FFFFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in program-memory space. For example, a write to FE00h has the same effect as a write to FF00h. For simplicity, addresses FE00h−FEFFh are referred to as reserved. § When CNF = 0, addresses 0100h−01FFh and 0200h−02FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0100h has the same effect as a write to 0200h. For simplicity, addresses 0100h−01FFh are referred to as reserved. ¶ Addresses 0300h−03FFh and 0400h−04FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B1) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0400h has the same effect as a write to 0300h. For simplicity, addresses 0400h−04FFh are referred to as reserved. ‡ Figure 5. TMS320LC2406A Memory Map POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 25 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 memory maps (continued) Hex 0000 Program On-Chip ROM (16K) Interrupt Vectors (0000−003Fh) Reserved † (0040−0043h) User code begins at 0044h 3FBF 3FC0 ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ 3FFF 4000 7FFF 8000 83FF 8400 Reserved Reserved SARAM (1K) Internal (PON = 1) Reserved (PON = 0) Hex 0000 005F 0060 007F 0080 00FF 0100 01FF 0200 02FF 0300 03FF 0400 04FF 0500 07FF 0800 0BFF 0C00 6FFF 7000 7FFF 8000 Reserved Reserved‡ On-Chip DARAM (B0)‡ (CNF = 1) Reserved (CNF = 0) FFFF FFFF On-Chip ROM memory Memory-Mapped Registers/Reserved Addresses ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ On-Chip DARAM B2 Illegal Reserved On-Chip DARAM (B0)§ (CNF = 0) Reserved (CNF = 1) ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ On-Chip DARAM (B1)¶ Reserved Illegal SARAM (1K) Internal (DON = 1) Reserved (DON = 0) Illegal Peripheral Memory-Mapped Registers (System, WD, ADC, SCI, SPI, I/O, Interrupts) ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉ ÉÉ ÈÈ ÈÈ Illegal FDFF FE00 FEFF FF00 Data SARAM (See Table 1 for details.) Reserved or Illegal † Addresses 0040h−0043h in program memory are reserved for code security passwords. When CNF = 1, addresses FE00h−FEFFh and FF00h−FFFFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in program-memory space. For example, a write to FE00h has the same effect as a write to FF00h. For simplicity, addresses FE00h−FEFFh are referred to as reserved. § When CNF = 0, addresses 0100h−01FFh and 0200h−02FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0100h has the same effect as a write to 0200h. For simplicity, addresses 0100h−01FFh are referred to as reserved. ¶ Addresses 0300h−03FFh and 0400h−04FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B1) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0400h has the same effect as a write to 0300h. For simplicity, addresses 0400h−04FFh are referred to as reserved. ‡ Figure 6. TMS320LC2404A Memory Map 26 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 memory maps (continued) Hex 0000 Program On-chip ROM (16K) Interrupt Vectors (0000−003Fh) Reserved † (0040−0043h) User code begins at 0044h 3FBF 3FCO 3FFF 4000 ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Reserved Reserved 7FFF 8000 81FF 8200 87FF 8800 SARAM (512 words) Internal (PON = 1) Reserved (PON = 0) Reserved Illegal FDFF FE00 Reserved‡ FEFF FF00 On-Chip DARAM (B0)‡ (CNF = 1) Reserved (CNF = 0) FFFF Hex 0000 Data Memory-Mapped Registers/Reserved Addresses ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ 005F 0060 007F 0080 00FF 0100 01FF 0200 02FF 0300 03FF 0400 04FF 0500 07FF 0800 On-Chip DARAM B2 Illegal Reserved On-Chip DARAM (B0)§ (CNF = 0) Reserved (CNF = 1) ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉÉ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÉÉÉ ÉÉÉ ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ On-Chip DARAM (B1)¶ Reserved Illegal SARAM (512 words) Internal (DON = 1) Reserved (DON = 0) 09FF 0A00 Reserved 0FFF 1000 6FFF 7000 7FFF 8000 Illegal Peripheral Memory-Mapped Registers (System, WD, ADC, SCI, I/O, Interrupts) Illegal FFFF On-Chip Flash Memory (Sectored) SARAM (See Table 1 for details.) Reserved or Illegal † Addresses 0040h−0043h in program memory are reserved for code security passwords. When CNF = 1, addresses FE00h−FEFFh and FF00h−FFFFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in program-memory space. For example, a write to FE00h has the same effect as a write to FF00h. For simplicity, addresses FE00h−FEFFh are referred to as reserved. § When CNF = 0, addresses 0100h−01FFh and 0200h−02FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0100h has the same effect as a write to 0200h. For simplicity, addresses 0100h−01FFh are referred to as reserved. ¶ Addresses 0300h−03FFh and 0400h−04FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B1) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0400h has the same effect as a write to 0300h. For simplicity, addresses 0400h−04FFh are referred to as reserved. ‡ Figure 7. TMS320LC2403A Memory Map POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 27 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 memory maps (continued) Hex 0000 17BF 17C0 17FF 1800 7FFF 8000 Program On-Chip ROM (6K) Interrupt Vectors (0000−003Fh) Reserved † (0040−0043h) User code begins at 0044h ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ 87FF 8800 Reserved Reserved Reserved Reserved FDFF FE00 Reserved‡ FEFF FF00 On-Chip DARAM (B0)‡ (CNF = 1) Reserved (CNF = 0) Hex 0000 005F 0060 007F 0080 00FF 0100 01FF 0200 02FF 0300 03FF 0400 04FF 0500 07FF 0800 Data Memory-Mapped Registers/Reserved Addresses ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ On-Chip DARAM B2 Illegal Reserved On-Chip DARAM (B0)§ (CNF = 0) Reserved (CNF = 1) ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ ÈÈÈ On-Chip DARAM (B1)¶ Reserved Illegal Reserved 0FFF 1000 6FFF 7000 7FFF 8000 Illegal Peripheral Memory-Mapped Registers (System, WD, ADC, SCI, I/O, Interrupts) Illegal FFFF FFFF On-Chip ROM memory Reserved or Illegal † Addresses 0040h−0043h in program memory are reserved for code security passwords. When CNF = 1, addresses FE00h−FEFFh and FF00h−FFFFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in program-memory space. For example, a write to FE00h has the same effect as a write to FF00h. For simplicity, addresses FE00h−FEFFh are referred to as reserved. § When CNF = 0, addresses 0100h−01FFh and 0200h−02FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B0) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0100h has the same effect as a write to 0200h. For simplicity, addresses 0100h−01FFh are referred to as reserved. ¶ Addresses 0300h−03FFh and 0400h−04FFh are mapped to the same physical block (B1) in data-memory space. For example, a write to 0400h has the same effect as a write to 0300h. For simplicity, addresses 0400h−04FFh are referred to as reserved. ‡ Figure 8. TMS320LC2402A Memory Map 28 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral memory map of the 2407A/2406A Interrupt-Mask Register Hex 0000 0003 0004 Reserved 0005 Interrupt Flag Register 0006 0007 Reserved Emulation Registers and Reserved Hex 0000 005F 0060 007F 0080 00FF 0100 Memory-Mapped Registers and Reserved ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ On-Chip DARAM B2 Illegal Reserved 01FF 0200 On-Chip DARAM B0 02FF 0300 03FF 0400 04FF 0500 07FF 0800 0FFF 1000 6FFF 7000 73FF 7400 743F 7440 74FF 7500 753F 7540 77EF 77F0 77F3 77F4 77FF 7800 7FFF 8000 FFFF On-Chip DARAM B1 ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Reserved Illegal SARAM (2K) Illegal Peripheral Frame 1 (PF1) ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Peripheral Frame 2 (PF2) Illegal Peripheral Frame 3 (PF3) Illegal Code Security Passwords ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈ Illegal Reserved † Reserved Illegal External† “Illegal” indicates that access to these addresses causes a nonmaskable interrupt (NMI). “Reserved” indicates addresses that are reserved for test. Available in LF2407A only POST OFFICE BOX 1443 005F ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Illegal 7000−700F System Configuration and Control Registers 7010−701F Watchdog Timer Registers 7020−702F Illegal 7030−703F SPI 7040−704F ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ SCI 7050−705F Illegal 7060−706F External-Interrupt Registers 7070−707F Illegal 7080−708F Digital I/O Control Registers 7090−709F ADC Control Registers 70A0−70BF Illegal 70C0−70FF CAN Control Registers 7100−710E Illegal 710F−71FF CAN Mailbox 7200−722F Illegal 7230−73FF Event Manager − EVA General-Purpose Timer Registers Compare, PWM, and Deadband Registers Capture and QEP Registers 7400−7408 7411−7419 7420−7429 ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ ÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈÈ Interrupt Mask, Vector and Flag Registers 742C−7431 Illegal 7432−743F Event Manager − EVB General-Purpose Timer Registers Compare, PWM, and Deadband Registers 7500−7508 7511−7519 Capture and QEP Registers 7520−7529 Interrupt Mask, Vector, and Flag Registers 752C−7531 Reserved 7532−753F • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 29 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 device reset and interrupts The TMS320x240xA software-programmable interrupt structure supports flexible on-chip and external interrupt configurations to meet real-time interrupt-driven application requirements. The LF240xA recognizes three types of interrupt sources. D Reset (hardware- or software-initiated) is unarbitrated by the CPU and takes immediate priority over any other executing functions. All maskable interrupts are disabled until the reset service routine enables them. The LF240xA devices have two sources of reset: an external reset pin and a watchdog timer time-out (reset). D D Hardware-generated interrupts are requested by external pins or by on-chip peripherals. There are two types: − External interrupts are generated by one of four external pins corresponding to the interrupts XINT1, XINT2, PDPINTA, and PDPINTB. These four can be masked both by dedicated enable bits and by the CPU interrupt mask register (IMR), which can mask each maskable interrupt line at the DSP core. − Peripheral interrupts are initiated internally by these on-chip peripheral modules: event manager A, event manager B, SPI, SCI, CAN, and ADC. They can be masked both by enable bits for each event in each peripheral and by the CPU IMR, which can mask each maskable interrupt line at the DSP core. Software-generated interrupts for the LF240xA devices include: − The INTR instruction. This instruction allows initialization of any LF240xA interrupt with software. Its operand indicates the interrupt vector location to which the CPU branches. This instruction globally disables maskable interrupts (sets the INTM bit to 1). − The NMI instruction. This instruction forces a branch to interrupt vector location 24h. This instruction globally disables maskable interrupts. 240xA devices do not have the NMI hardware signal, only software activation is provided. − The TRAP instruction. This instruction forces the CPU to branch to interrupt vector location 22h. The TRAP instruction does not disable maskable interrupts (INTM is not set to 1); therefore, when the CPU branches to the interrupt service routine, that routine can be interrupted by the maskable hardware interrupts. − An emulator trap. This interrupt can be generated with either an INTR instruction or a TRAP instruction. Six core interrupts (INT1−INT6) are expanded using a peripheral interrupt expansion (PIE) module identical to the F24x devices. The PIE manages all the peripheral interrupts from the 240xA peripherals and are grouped to share the six core level interrupts. Figure 9 shows the PIE block diagram for hardware-generated interrupts. The PIE block diagram (Figure 9) and the interrupt table (Table 3) explain the grouping and interrupt vector maps. LF240xA devices have interrupts identical to those of the F24x devices and should be completely code-compatible. 240xA devices also have peripheral interrupts identical to those of the F24x − plus additional interrupts for new peripherals such as event manager B. Though the new interrupts share the 24x interrupt grouping, they all have a unique vector to differentiate among the interrupts. See Table 3 for details. 30 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 device reset and interrupts (continued) PDPINTA PDPINTB XINT2 SPIINT RXINT TXINT CANMBINT CANERINT CMP1INT CMP2INT CMP3INT CMP4INT CMP5INT CMP6INT T1PINT T1CINT T1UFINT T1OFINT T3PINT T3CINT T3UFINT T3OFINT T2PINT T2CINT T2UFINT T2OFINT T4PINT T4CINT T4UFINT T4OFINT IMR IFR Level 1 IRQ GEN INT1 INT2 Level 2 IRQ GEN CPU INT3 Level 3 IRQ GEN CAP1INT CAP2INT CAP3INT CAP4INT CAP5INT CAP6INT Level 4 IRQ GEN SPIINT RXINT TXINT CANMBINT CANERINT Level 5 IRQ GEN ADCINT XINT1 XINT2 PIE ADCINT XINT1 INT4 INT5 INT6 Level 6 IRQ GEN IACK PIVR & Logic PIRQR# PIACK# Data Bus Addr Bus Indicates change with respect to the TMS320F243/F241/C242 data sheets. Interrupts from external interrupt pins. The remaining interrupts are internal to the peripherals. Figure 9. Peripheral Interrupt Expansion (PIE) Module Block Diagram for Hardware-Generated Interrupts POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 31 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 interrupt request structure Table 3. LF240xA/LC240xA Interrupt Source Priority and Vectors OVERALL PRIORITY CPU INTERRUPT AND VECTOR ADDRESS Reset 1 Reserved PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT VECTOR (PIV) MASKABLE? SOURCE PERIPHERAL MODULE RSN 0000h N/A N RS pin, Watchdog 2 − 0026h N/A N CPU NMI 3 NMI 0024h N/A N Nonmaskable Interrupt Nonmaskable interrupt, software interrupt only PDPINTA 4 0.0 0020h Y EVA PDPINTB 5 2.0 0019h Y EVB Power device protection interrupt pins ADCINT 6 0.1 0004h Y ADC XINT1 7 0.2 0001h Y External Interrupt Logic INTERRUPT NAME XINT2 8 INT1 0002h BIT POSITION IN PIRQRx AND PIACKRx DESCRIPTION Reset from pin, watchdog timeout Emulator trap ADC interrupt in high-priority mode External interrupt pins in high priority 0.3 0011h Y External Interrupt Logic 0.4 0005h Y SPI SPI interrupt pins in high priority SPIINT 9 RXINT 10 0.5 0006h Y SCI SCI receiver interrupt in high-priority mode TXINT 11 0.6 0007h Y SCI SCI transmitter interrupt in high-priority mode CANMBINT 12 0.7 0040 Y CAN CAN mailbox in high-priority mode CANERINT 13 0.8 0041 Y CAN CAN error interrupt in high-priority mode CMP1INT 14 0.9 0021h Y EVA Compare 1 interrupt CMP2INT 15 0.10 0022h Y EVA Compare 2 interrupt CMP3INT 16 0.11 0023h Y EVA Compare 3 interrupt T1PINT 17 0.12 0027h Y EVA Timer 1 period interrupt T1CINT 18 0.13 0028h Y EVA Timer 1 compare interrupt T1UFINT 19 0.14 0029h Y EVA Timer 1 underflow interrupt T1OFINT 20 0.15 002Ah Y EVA Timer 1 overflow interrupt CMP4INT 21 2.1 0024h Y EVB Compare 4 interrupt CMP5INT 22 2.2 0025h Y EVB Compare 5 interrupt CMP6INT 23 2.3 0026h Y EVB Compare 6 interrupt T3PINT 24 2.4 002Fh Y EVB Timer 3 period interrupt T3CINT 25 2.5 0030h Y EVB Timer 3 compare interrupt T3UFINT 26 2.6 0031h Y EVB Timer 3 underflow interrupt T3OFINT 27 2.7 0032h Y EVB Timer 3 overflow interrupt INT2 0004h † See the TMS320LF/LC240xA DSP Controllers Reference Guide: System and Peripherals (literature number SPRU357) for more information. NOTE: Some interrupts may not be available in a particular device due to the absence of a peripheral. See Table 1 for more details. New peripheral interrupts and vectors with respect to the F243/F241 devices. 32 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 interrupt request structure (continued) Table 3. LF240xA/LC240xA Interrupt Source Priority and Vectors (Continued) INTERRUPT NAME OVERALL PRIORITY CPU INTERRUPT AND VECTOR ADDRESS BIT POSITION IN PIRQRx AND PIACKRx PERIPHERAL INTERRUPT VECTOR (PIV) MASKABLE? SOURCE PERIPHERAL MODULE DESCRIPTION T2PINT 28 1.0 002Bh Y EVA Timer 2 period interrupt T2CINT 29 1.1 002Ch Y EVA Timer 2 compare interrupt T2UFINT 30 1.2 002Dh Y EVA Timer 2 underflow interrupt T2OFINT 31 1.3 002Eh Y EVA Timer 2 overflow interrupt T4PINT 32 2.8 0039h Y EVB Timer 4 period interrupt T4CINT 33 2.9 003Ah Y EVB Timer 4 compare interrupt T4UFINT 34 2.10 003Bh Y EVB Timer 4 underflow interrupt T4OFINT 35 2.11 003Ch Y EVB Timer 4 overflow interrupt CAP1INT 36 1.4 0033h Y EVA Capture 1 interrupt CAP2INT 37 1.5 0034h Y EVA Capture 2 interrupt CAP3INT 38 1.6 0035h Y EVA Capture 3 interrupt CAP4INT 39 2.12 0036h Y EVB Capture 4 interrupt CAP5INT 40 2.13 0037h Y EVB Capture 5 interrupt CAP6INT 41 2.14 0038h Y EVB Capture 6 interrupt SPIINT 42 1.7 0005h Y SPI SPI interrupt (low priority) RXINT 43 1.8 0006h Y SCI SCI receiver interrupt (low-priority mode) TXINT 44 1.9 0007h Y SCI SCI transmitter interrupt (low-priority mode) CANMBINT 45 1.10 0040h Y CAN CAN mailbox interrupt (low-priority mode) CANERINT 46 1.11 0041h Y CAN CAN error interrupt (low-priority mode) ADCINT 47 1.12 0004h Y ADC ADC interrupt (low priority) XINT1 48 1.13 0001h Y External Interrupt Logic Y External Interrupt Logic XINT2 INT3 0006h INT4 0008h INT5 000Ah INT6 000Ch 49 Reserved 1.14 0011h External interrupt pins (low-priority mode) 000Eh N/A Y CPU Analysis interrupt TRAP N/A 0022h N/A N/A CPU TRAP instruction Phantom Interrupt Vector N/A N/A 0000h N/A CPU Phantom interrupt vector INT8−INT16 N/A 0010h−0020h N/A N/A CPU INT20−INT31 N/A 00028h−0003Fh N/A N/A CPU Software interrupt vectors† † See the TMS320LF/LC240xA DSP Controllers Reference Guide: System and Peripherals (literature number SPRU357) for more information. NOTE: Some interrupts may not be available in a particular device due to the absence of a peripheral. See Table 1 for more details. New peripheral interrupts and vectors with respect to the F243/F241 devices. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 33 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 DSP CPU core The TMS320x240xA devices use an advanced Harvard-type architecture that maximizes processing power by maintaining two separate memory bus structures — program and data — for full-speed execution. This multiple bus structure allows data and instructions to be read simultaneously. Instructions support data transfers between program memory and data memory. This architecture permits coefficients that are stored in program memory to be read in RAM, thereby eliminating the need for a separate coefficient ROM. This, coupled with a four-deep pipeline, allows the LF240xA/LC240xA devices to execute most instructions in a single cycle. See the functional block diagram of the 240xA DSP CPU for more information. TMS320x240xA instruction set The x240xA microprocessor implements a comprehensive instruction set that supports both numeric-intensive signal-processing operations and general-purpose applications, such as multiprocessing and high-speed control. For maximum throughput, the next instruction is prefetched while the current one is being executed. Because the same data lines are used to communicate to external data, program, or I/O space, the number of cycles an instruction requires to execute varies, depending upon whether the next data operand fetch is from internal or external memory. Highest throughput is achieved by maintaining data memory on chip and using either internal or fast external program memory. addressing modes The TMS320x240xA instruction set provides four basic memory-addressing modes: direct, indirect, immediate, and register. In direct addressing, the instruction word contains the lower seven bits of the data memory address. This field is concatenated with the nine bits of the data memory page pointer (DP) to form the 16-bit data memory address. Therefore, in the direct-addressing mode, data memory is paged effectively with a total of 512 pages, with each page containing 128 words. Indirect addressing accesses data memory through the auxiliary registers. In this addressing mode, the address of the instruction operand is contained in the currently selected auxiliary register. Eight auxiliary registers (AR0−AR7) provide flexible and powerful indirect addressing. To select a specific auxiliary register, the auxiliary register pointer (ARP) is loaded with a value from 0 to 7 for AR0 through AR7, respectively. scan-based emulation TMS320x2xx devices incorporate scan-based emulation logic for code-development and hardwaredevelopment support. Scan-based emulation allows the emulator to control the processor in the system without the use of intrusive cables to the full pinout of the device. The scan-based emulator communicates with the x2xx by way of the IEEE 1149.1-compatible (JTAG) interface. The x240xA DSPs do not include boundary scan. The scan chain of these devices is useful for emulation function only. 34 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 functional block diagram of the 2407A DSP CPU Program Bus IS DS PS 16 PC PAR MSTACK MUX RD WE RS MP/MC XINT[1−2] NPAR Data Bus Control XTAL1 CLKOUT XTAL2 Program Bus MUX R/W STRB READY XF Stack 8 × 16 2 FLASH EEPROM/ ROM MUX A15−A0 16 Program Control (PCTRL) 16 16 16 16 16 MUX D15−D0 16 16 Data Bus 16 Data Bus 16 16 9 3 AR0(16) DP(9) AR1(16) 16 7 LSB from IR 16 9 AR4(16) AR5(16) ARB(3) 16 MUX MUX AR3(16) 3 3 16 16 AR2(16) ARP(3) 16 TREG0(16) AR6(16) Multiplier AR7(16) 3 ISCALE (0−16) PREG(32) 16 32 PSCALE (−6, 0, 1, 4) 32 32 16 MUX 16 CALU(32) 32 MUX MUX Data/Prog DARAM B0 (256 × 16) Data DARAM B2 (32 × 16) IMR (16) IFR (16) 32 32 Memory Map Register GREG (16) MUX C ACCH(16) ACCL(16) 32 B1 (256 × 16) MUX OSCALE (0−7) 16 16 Program Bus ARAU(16) 16 16 NOTES: A. See Table 4 for symbol descriptions. B. For clarity, the data and program buses are shown as single buses although they include address and data bits. C. See the TMS320F/C24x DSP Controllers Reference Guide: CPU and Instruction Set (literature number SPRU160) for CPU instruction set information. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 35 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 240xA legend for the internal hardware Table 4. Legend for the 240xA DSP CPU Internal Hardware SYMBOL NAME DESCRIPTION ACC Accumulator 32-bit register that stores the results and provides input for subsequent CALU operations. Also includes shift and rotate capabilities ARAU Auxiliary Register Arithmetic Unit An unsigned, 16-bit arithmetic unit used to calculate indirect addresses using the auxiliary registers as inputs and outputs AUX REGS Auxiliary Registers 0 −7 These 16-bit registers are used as pointers to anywhere within the data space address range. They are operated upon by the ARAU and are selected by the auxiliary register pointer (ARP). AR0 can also be used as an index value for AR updates of more than one and as a compare value to AR. C Carry Register carry output from CALU. C is fed back into the CALU for extended arithmetic operation. The C bit resides in status register 1 (ST1), and can be tested in conditional instructions. C is also used in accumulator shifts and rotates. CALU Central Arithmetic Logic Unit 32-bit-wide main arithmetic logic unit for the TMS320C2xx core. The CALU executes 32-bit operations in a single machine cycle. CALU operates on data coming from ISCALE or PSCALE with data from ACC, and provides status results to PCTRL. DARAM Dual-Access RAM If the on-chip RAM configuration control bit (CNF) is set to 0, the reconfigurable data dual-access RAM (DARAM) block B0 is mapped to data space; otherwise, B0 is mapped to program space. Blocks B1 and B2 are mapped to data memory space only, at addresses 0300−03FF and 0060−007F, respectively. Blocks 0 and 1 contain 256 words, while block 2 contains 32 words. DP Data Memory Page Pointer The 9-bit DP register is concatenated with the seven least significant bits (LSBs) of an instruction word to form a direct memory address of 16 bits. DP can be modified by the LST and LDP instructions. GREG Global Memory Allocation Register GREG specifies the size of the global data memory space. Since the global memory space is not used in the 240xA devices, this register is reserved. IMR Interrupt Mask Register IMR individually masks or enables the six core-level interrupts. IFR Interrupt Flag Register The 6-bit IFR indicates that the TMS320Lx240xA has latched an interrupt from one of the six maskable interrupts. INT# Interrupt Traps A total of 32 interrupts by way of hardware and/or software are available. ISCALE Input Data-Scaling Shifter 16- to 32-bit barrel left-shifter. ISCALE shifts incoming 16-bit data 0 to16 positions left, relative to the 32-bit output within the fetch cycle; therefore, no cycle overhead is required for input scaling operations. MPY Multiplier 16 × 16-bit multiplier to a 32-bit product. MPY executes multiplication in a single cycle. MPY operates either signed or unsigned 2s-complement arithmetic multiply. MSTACK Micro Stack MSTACK provides temporary storage for the address of the next instruction to be fetched when program address-generation logic is used to generate sequential addresses in data space. MUX Multiplexer Multiplexes buses to a common input NPAR Next Program Address Register NPAR holds the program address to be driven out on the PAB in the next cycle. OSCALE Output Data-Scaling Shifter 16- to 32-bit barrel left-shifter. OSCALE shifts the 32-bit accumulator output 0 to 7 bits left for quantization management and outputs either the 16-bit high- or low-half of the shifted 32-bit data to the data-write data bus (DWEB). PAR Program Address Register PAR holds the address currently being driven on PAB for as many cycles as it takes to complete all memory operations scheduled for the current bus cycle. PC Program Counter PC increments the value from NPAR to provide sequential addresses for instruction-fetching and sequential data-transfer operations. PCTRL Program Controller PCTRL decodes instruction, manages the pipeline, stores status, and decodes conditional operations. 36 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 240xA legend for the internal hardware (continued) Table 4. Legend for the 240xA DSP CPU Internal Hardware (Continued) SYMBOL NAME DESCRIPTION PREG Product Register 32-bit register holds results of 16 × 16 multiply PSCALE Product-Scaling Shifter 0-, 1-, or 4-bit left shift, or 6-bit right shift of multiplier product. The left-shift options are used to manage the additional sign bits resulting from the 2s-complement multiply. The right-shift option is used to scale down the number to manage overflow of product accumulation in the CALU. PSCALE resides in the path from the 32-bit product shifter and from either the CALU or the data-write data bus (DWEB), and requires no cycle overhead. STACK Stack STACK is a block of memory used for storing return addresses for subroutines and interrupt-service routines, or for storing data. The C2xx stack is 16 bits wide and 8 levels deep. TREG Temporary Register 16-bit register holds one of the operands for the multiply operations. TREG holds the dynamic shift count for the LACT, ADDT, and SUBT instructions. TREG holds the dynamic bit position for the BITT instruction. status and control registers Two status registers, ST0 and ST1, contain the status of various conditions and modes. These registers can be stored into data memory and loaded from data memory, thus allowing the status of the machine to be saved and restored for subroutines. The load status register (LST) instruction is used to write to ST0 and ST1. The store status register (SST) instruction is used to read from ST0 and ST1 — except for the INTM bit, which is not affected by the LST instruction. The individual bits of these registers can be set or cleared when using the SETC and CLRC instructions. Figure 10 shows the organization of status registers ST0 and ST1, indicating all status bits contained in each. Several bits in the status registers are reserved and are read as logic 1s. Table 5 lists status register field definitions. 15 ST0 13 ARP 15 ST1 13 ARB 12 11 10 9 OV OVM 1 INTM 8 0 DP 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 CNF TC SXM C 1 1 1 1 XF 1 1 1 0 PM Figure 10. Organization of Status Registers ST0 and ST1 Table 5. Status Register Field Definitions FIELD FUNCTION ARB Auxiliary register pointer buffer. When the ARP is loaded into ST0, the old ARP value is copied to the ARB except during an LST instruction. When the ARB is loaded by way of an LST #1 instruction, the same value is also copied to the ARP. ARP Auxiliary register (AR) pointer. ARP selects the AR to be used in indirect addressing. When the ARP is loaded, the old ARP value is copied to the ARB register. ARP can be modified by memory-reference instructions when using indirect addressing, and by the LARP, MAR, and LST instructions. The ARP is also loaded with the same value as ARB when an LST #1 instruction is executed. C Carry bit. C is set to 1 if the result of an addition generates a carry, or reset to 0 if the result of a subtraction generates a borrow. Otherwise, C is reset after an addition or set after a subtraction, except if the instruction is ADD or SUB with a 16-bit shift. In these cases, ADD can only set and SUB can only reset the carry bit, but cannot affect it otherwise. The single-bit shift and rotate instructions also affect C, as well as the SETC, CLRC, and LST #1 instructions. Branch instructions have been provided to branch on the status of C. C is set to 1 on a reset. CNF On-chip RAM configuration control bit. If CNF is set to 0, the reconfigurable data dual-access RAM blocks are mapped to data space; otherwise, they are mapped to program space. The CNF can be modified by the SETC CNF, CLRC CNF, and LST #1 instructions. RS sets the CNF to 0. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 37 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 status and control registers (continued) Table 5. Status Register Field Definitions (Continued) FIELD FUNCTION DP Data memory page pointer. The 9-bit DP register is concatenated with the 7 LSBs of an instruction word to form a direct memory address of 16 bits. DP can be modified by the LST and LDP instructions. INTM Interrupt mode bit. When INTM is set to 0, all unmasked interrupts are enabled. When set to 1, all maskable interrupts are disabled. INTM is set and reset by the SETC INTM and CLRC INTM instructions. RS also sets INTM. INTM has no effect on the unmaskable RS and NMI interrupts. Note that INTM is unaffected by the LST instruction. This bit is set to 1 by reset. It is also set to 1 when a maskable interrupt trap is taken. OV Overflow flag bit. As a latched overflow signal, OV is set to 1 when overflow occurs in the arithmetic logic unit (ALU). Once an overflow occurs, the OV remains set until a reset, BCND/D on OV/NOV, or LST instruction clears OV. OVM Overflow mode bit. When OVM is set to 0, overflowed results overflow normally in the accumulator. When set to 1, the accumulator is set to either its most positive or negative value upon encountering an overflow. The SETC and CLRC instructions set and reset this bit, respectively. LST can also be used to modify the OVM. PM Product shift mode. If these two bits are 00, the multiplier’s 32-bit product is loaded into the ALU with no shift. If PM = 01, the PREG output is left-shifted one place and loaded into the ALU, with the LSB zero-filled. If PM = 10, the PREG output is left-shifted by 4 bits and loaded into the ALU, with the LSBs zero-filled. PM = 11 produces a right shift of 6 bits, sign-extended. Note that the PREG contents remain unchanged. The shift takes place when transferring the contents of the PREG to the ALU. PM is loaded by the SPM and LST #1 instructions. PM is cleared by RS. SXM Sign-extension mode bit. SXM = 1 produces sign extension on data as it is passed into the accumulator through the scaling shifter. SXM = 0 suppresses sign extension. SXM does not affect the definitions of certain instructions; for example, the ADDS instruction suppresses sign extension regardless of SXM. SXM is set by the SETC SXM instruction and reset by the CLRC SXM instruction and can be loaded by the LST #1 instruction. SXM is set to 1 by reset. TC Test/control flag bit. TC is affected by the BIT, BITT, CMPR, LST #1, and NORM instructions. TC is set to a 1 if a bit tested by BIT or BITT is a 1, if a compare condition tested by CMPR exists between AR (ARP) and AR0, if the exclusive-OR function of the 2 most significant bits (MSBs) of the accumulator is true when tested by a NORM instruction. The conditional branch, call, and return instructions can execute based on the condition of TC. XF XF pin status bit. XF indicates the state of the XF pin, a general-purpose output pin. XF is set by the SETC XF instruction and reset by the CLRC XF instruction. XF is set to 1 by reset. central processing unit The TMS320x240xA central processing unit (CPU) contains a 16-bit scaling shifter, a 16 x 16-bit parallel multiplier, a 32-bit central arithmetic logic unit (CALU), a 32-bit accumulator, and additional shifters at the outputs of both the accumulator and the multiplier. This section describes the CPU components and their functions. The functional block diagram shows the components of the CPU. input scaling shifter The TMS320x240xA provides a scaling shifter with a 16-bit input connected to the data bus and a 32-bit output connected to the CALU. This shifter operates as part of the path of data coming from program or data space to the CALU and requires no cycle overhead. It is used to align the 16-bit data coming from memory to the 32-bit CALU. This is necessary for scaling arithmetic as well as aligning masks for logical operations. The scaling shifter produces a left shift of 0 to 16 on the input data. The LSBs of the output are filled with zeros; the MSBs can either be filled with zeros or sign-extended, depending upon the value of the SXM bit (sign-extension mode) of status register ST1. The shift count is specified by a constant embedded in the instruction word or by a value in TREG. The shift count in the instruction allows for specific scaling or alignment operations specific to that point in the code. The TREG base shift allows the scaling factor to be adaptable to the system’s performance. 38 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 multiplier The TMS320x240xA devices use a 16 x 16-bit hardware multiplier that is capable of computing a signed or an unsigned 32-bit product in a single machine cycle. All multiply instructions, except the MPYU (multiply unsigned) instruction, perform a signed multiply operation. That is, two numbers being multiplied are treated as 2s-complement numbers, and the result is a 32-bit 2s-complement number. There are two registers associated with the multiplier, as follow: D D 16-bit temporary register (TREG) that holds one of the operands for the multiplier 32-bit product register (PREG) that holds the product Four product-shift modes (PM) are available at the PREG output (PSCALE). These shift modes are useful for performing multiply/accumulate operations, performing fractional arithmetic, or justifying fractional products. The PM field of status register ST1 specifies the PM shift mode, as shown in Table 6. Table 6. PSCALE Product-Shift Modes PM SHIFT 00 No shift DESCRIPTION 01 Left 1 Removes the extra sign bit generated in a 2s-complement multiply to produce a Q31 product 10 Left 4 Removes the extra 4 sign bits generated in a 16x13 2s-complement multiply to a produce a Q31 product when using the multiply-by-a-13-bit constant 11 Right 6 Scales the product to allow up to 128 product accumulation without the possibility of accumulator overflow Product feed to CALU or data bus with no shift The product can be shifted one bit to compensate for the extra sign bit gained in multiplying two 16-bit 2s-complement numbers (MPY instruction). A four-bit shift is used in conjunction with the MPY instruction with a short immediate value (13 bits or less) to eliminate the four extra sign bits gained in multiplying a 16-bit number by a 13-bit number. Finally, the output of PREG can be right-shifted 6 bits to enable the execution of up to 128 consecutive multiply/accumulates without the possibility of overflow. The LT (load TREG) instruction normally loads TREG to provide one operand (from the data bus), and the MPY (multiply) instruction provides the second operand (also from the data bus). A multiplication also can be performed with a 13-bit immediate operand when using the MPY instruction. Then, a product is obtained every two cycles. When the code is executing multiple multiplies and product sums, the CPU supports the pipelining of the TREG load operations with CALU operations using the previous product. The pipeline operations that run in parallel with loading the TREG include: load ACC with PREG (LTP); add PREG to ACC (LTA); add PREG to ACC and shift TREG input data (DMOV) to next address in data memory (LTD); and subtract PREG from ACC (LTS). Two multiply/accumulate instructions (MAC and MACD) fully utilize the computational bandwidth of the multiplier, allowing both operands to be processed simultaneously. The data for these operations can be transferred to the multiplier each cycle by way of the program and data buses. This facilitates single-cycle multiply/accumulates when used with the repeat (RPT) instruction. In these instructions, the coefficient addresses are generated by program address generation (PAGEN) logic, while the data addresses are generated by data address generation (DAGEN) logic. This allows the repeated instruction to access the values from the coefficient table sequentially and step through the data in any of the indirect addressing modes. The MACD instruction, when repeated, supports filter constructs (weighted running averages) so that as the sum-of-products is executed, the sample data is shifted in memory to make room for the next sample and to throw away the oldest sample. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 39 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 multiplier (continued) The MPYU instruction performs an unsigned multiplication, which greatly facilitates extended-precision arithmetic operations. The unsigned contents of TREG are multiplied by the unsigned contents of the addressed data memory location, with the result placed in PREG. This process allows the operands of greater than 16 bits to be broken down into 16-bit words and processed separately to generate products of greater than 32 bits. The SQRA (square / add) and SQRS (square/subtract) instructions pass the same value to both inputs of the multiplier for squaring a data memory value. After the multiplication of two 16-bit numbers, the 32-bit product is loaded into the 32-bit product register (PREG). The product from PREG can be transferred to the CALU or to data memory by way of the SPH (store product high) and SPL (store product low) instructions. Note: the transfer of PREG to either the CALU or data bus passes through the PSCALE shifter, and therefore is affected by the product shift mode defined by PM. This is important when saving PREG in an interrupt-service-routine context save as the PSCALE shift effects cannot be modeled in the restore operation. PREG can be cleared by executing the MPY #0 instruction. The product register can be restored by loading the saved low half into TREG and executing a MPY #1 instruction. The high half, then, is loaded using the LPH instruction. central arithmetic logic unit The TMS320x240xA central arithmetic logic unit (CALU) implements a wide range of arithmetic and logical functions, the majority of which execute in a single clock cycle. This ALU is referred to as central to differentiate it from a second ALU used for indirect-address generation called the auxiliary register arithmetic unit (ARAU). Once an operation is performed in the CALU, the result is transferred to the accumulator (ACC) where additional operations, such as shifting, can occur. Data that is input to the CALU can be scaled by ISCALE when coming from one of the data buses (DRDB or PRDB) or scaled by PSCALE when coming from the multiplier. The CALU is a general-purpose ALU that operates on 16-bit words taken from data memory or derived from immediate instructions. In addition to the usual arithmetic instructions, the CALU can perform Boolean operations, facilitating the bit-manipulation ability required for a high-speed controller. One input to the CALU is always provided from the accumulator, and the other input can be provided from the product register (PREG) of the multiplier or the output of the scaling shifter (that has been read from data memory or from the ACC). After the CALU has performed the arithmetic or logical operation, the result is stored in the accumulator. The TMS320x240xA devices support floating-point operations for applications requiring a large dynamic range. The NORM (normalization) instruction is used to normalize fixed-point numbers contained in the accumulator by performing left shifts. The four bits of the TREG define a variable shift through the scaling shifter for the LACT/ADDT/SUBT (load/add to/subtract from accumulator with shift specified by TREG) instructions. These instructions are useful in floating-point arithmetic where a number needs to be denormalized — that is, floating-point to fixed-point conversion. They are also useful in the execution of an automatic gain control (AGC) going into a filter. The BITT (bit test) instruction provides testing of a single bit of a word in data memory based on the value contained in the four LSBs of TREG. The CALU overflow saturation mode can be enabled/disabled by setting/resetting the OVM bit of ST0. When the CALU is in the overflow saturation mode and an overflow occurs, the overflow flag is set and the accumulator is loaded with either the most positive or the most negative value representable in the accumulator, depending on the direction of the overflow. The value of the accumulator at saturation is 07FFFFFFFh (positive) or 080000000h (negative). If the OVM (overflow mode) status register bit is reset and an overflow occurs, the overflowed results are loaded into the accumulator with modification. (Note that logical operations cannot result in overflow.) The CALU can execute a variety of branch instructions that depend on the status of the CALU and the accumulator. These instructions can be executed conditionally based on any meaningful combination of these status bits. For overflow management, these conditions include OV (branch on overflow) and EQ (branch on accumulator equal to zero). In addition, the BACC (branch to address in accumulator) instruction provides the ability to branch to an address specified by the accumulator (computed goto). Bit test instructions (BIT and BITT), which do not affect the accumulator, allow the testing of a specified bit of a word in data memory. 40 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 central arithmetic logic unit (continued) The CALU also has an associated carry bit that is set or reset depending on various operations within the device. The carry bit allows more efficient computation of extended-precision products and additions or subtractions. It is also useful in overflow management. The carry bit is affected by most arithmetic instructions as well as the single-bit shift and rotate instructions. It is not affected by loading the accumulator, logical operations, or other such non-arithmetic or control instructions. The ADDC (add to accumulator with carry) and SUBB (subtract from accumulator with borrow) instructions use the previous value of carry in their addition/subtraction operation. The one exception to the operation of the carry bit is in the use of ADD with a shift count of 16 (add to high accumulator) and SUB with a shift count of 16 (subtract from high accumulator) instructions. This case of the ADD instruction can set the carry bit only if a carry is generated, and this case of the SUB instruction can reset the carry bit only if a borrow is generated; otherwise, neither instruction affects it. Two conditional operands, C and NC, are provided for branching, calling, returning, and conditionally executing, based upon the status of the carry bit. The SETC, CLRC, and LST #1 instructions also can be used to load the carry bit. The carry bit is set to one on a hardware reset. accumulator The 32-bit accumulator is the registered output of the CALU. It can be split into two 16-bit segments for storage in data memory. Shifters at the output of the accumulator provide a left shift of 0 to 7 places. This shift is performed while the data is being transferred to the data bus for storage. The contents of the accumulator remain unchanged. When the postscaling shifter is used on the high word of the accumulator (bits 16−31), the MSBs are lost and the LSBs are filled with bits shifted in from the low word (bits 0−15). When the postscaling shifter is used on the low word, the LSBs are zero-filled. The SFL and SFR (in-place one-bit shift to the left / right) instructions and the ROL and ROR (rotate to the left/right) instructions implement shifting or rotating of the contents of the accumulator through the carry bit. The SXM bit affects the definition of the SFR (shift accumulator right) instruction. When SXM = 1, SFR performs an arithmetic right shift, maintaining the sign of the accumulator data. When SXM = 0, SFR performs a logical shift, shifting out the LSBs and shifting in a zero for the MSB. The SFL (shift accumulator left) instruction is not affected by the SXM bit and behaves the same in both cases, shifting out the MSB and shifting in a zero. Repeat (RPT) instructions can be used with the shift and rotate instructions for multiple-bit shifts. auxiliary registers and auxiliary-register arithmetic unit (ARAU) The 240xA provides a register file containing eight auxiliary registers (AR0 −AR7). The auxiliary registers are used for indirect addressing of the data memory or for temporary data storage. Indirect auxiliary-register addressing allows placement of the data memory address of an instruction operand into one of the auxiliary registers. These registers are referenced with a 3-bit auxiliary register pointer (ARP) that is loaded with a value from 0 through 7, designating AR0 through AR7, respectively. The auxiliary registers and the ARP can be loaded from data memory, the ACC, the product register, or by an immediate operand defined in the instruction. The contents of these registers also can be stored in data memory or used as inputs to the CALU. The auxiliary register file (AR0−AR7) is connected to the ARAU. The ARAU can autoindex the current auxiliary register while the data memory location is being addressed. Indexing either by ±1 or by the contents of the AR0 register can be performed. As a result, accessing tables of information does not require the CALU for address manipulation; therefore, the CALU is free for other operations in parallel. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 41 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 internal memory The TMS320x240xA devices are configured with the following memory modules: D D D D D Dual-access random-access memory (DARAM) Single-access random-access memory (SARAM) Flash ROM Boot ROM dual-access RAM (DARAM) There are 544 words × 16 bits of DARAM on the 240xA devices. The 240xA DARAM allows writes to and reads from the RAM in the same cycle. The DARAM is configured in three blocks: block 0 (B0), block 1 (B1), and block 2 (B2). Block 1 contains 256 words and Block 2 contains 32 words, and both blocks are located only in data memory space. Block 0 contains 256 words, and can be configured to reside in either data or program memory space. The SETC CNF (configure B0 as program memory) and CLRC CNF (configure B0 as data memory) instructions allow dynamic configuration of the memory maps through software. When using on-chip RAM, the 240xA runs at full speed with no wait states. The ability of the DARAM to allow two accesses to be performed in one cycle, coupled with the parallel nature of the 240xA architecture, enables the device to perform three concurrent memory accesses in any given machine cycle. Externally, the READY line or on-chip software wait-state generator can be used to interface the 2407A to slower, less expensive external memory. single-access RAM (SARAM) There are 2K words × 16 bits of SARAM on some of the 240xA devices.† The PON and DON bits select SARAM (2K) mapping in program space, data space, or both. See Table 19 for details on the SCSR2 register and the PON and DON bits. At reset, these bits are 11, and the on-chip SARAM is mapped in both the program and data spaces. The SARAM (starting at 8000h in program memory) is accessible in external memory space (for 2407A only), if the on-chip SARAM is not enabled. flash EEPROM Flash EEPROM provides an attractive alternative to masked program ROM. Like ROM, Flash is nonvolatile. However, it has the advantage of “in-target” reprogrammability. The LF2407A incorporates one 32K 16-bit Flash EEPROM module in program space. The Flash module has multiple sectors that can be individually protected while erasing or programming. The sector size is non-uniform and partitioned as 4K/12K/12K/4K sectors. Unlike most discrete Flash memory, the LF240xA Flash does not require a dedicated state machine, because the algorithms for programming and erasing the Flash are executed by the DSP core. This enables several advantages, including: reduced chip size and sophisticated, adaptive algorithms. For production programming, the IEEE Standard 1149.1‡ (JTAG) scan port provides easy access to the on-chip RAM for downloading the algorithms and Flash code. This Flash requires 5 V for programming (at VCCP pin only) the array. The Flash runs at zero wait state while the device is powered at 3.3 V. ROM The LC240xA devices contain mask-programmable ROM located in program memory space. Customers can arrange to have this ROM programmed with contents unique to any particular application. See Table 1 for the ROM memory capacity of each LC240xA device. † ‡ 42 See Table 1 for device-specific features. IEEE Standard 1149.1−1990, IEEE Standard Test Access Port. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 boot ROM (LF240xA only) Boot ROM is a 256-word ROM memory-mapped in program space 0000−00FF. This ROM will be enabled if the BOOT_EN pin is low during reset. The BOOT_EN bit (bit 3 of the SCSR2 register) will be set to 0 if the BOOT_EN pin is low at reset. Boot ROM can also be enabled by writing 0 to the SCSR2.3 bit and disabled by writing 1 to this bit. The boot ROM has a generic bootloader to transfer code through SCI or SPI ports. The incoming code should disable the BOOT_ROM bit by writing 1 to bit 3 of the SCSR2 register, or else, the whole Flash array will not be enabled. The boot ROM code sets the PLL to x2 or x4 option based on the condition of the SCITXD pin during reset. The SCITXD pin should be pulled high/low to select the PLL multiplication factor. The choices made are as follows: D D D If the SCITXD pin is pulled low, the PLL multiplier is set to 2. If the SCITXD pin is pulled high, the PLL multiplier is set to 4. (Default) If the SCITXD pin is not driven at reset, the internal pullup selects the default multiplier of 4. Care should be taken such that a combination of CLKIN and the PLL multiplication factor should not result in a CPU clock speed of greater than 40 MHz, the maximum rated speed. Furthermore, when the bootloader is used, only specific values of CLKIN would result in a baud-lock for the SCI. See the TMS320LF/LC240xA DSP Controllers Reference Guide: System and Peripherals (literature number SPRU357) for more details about the bootloader operation. flash/ROM security 240xA devices incorporate a security feature that prevents external access to program memory. This feature is useful in preventing unauthorized duplication of proprietary code. If access to Flash/ROM contents are desired for debugging purposes, two actions need to be taken: 1. A “dummy” read of locations 40h, 41h, 42h and 43h (of program memory space) is necessary. The word “dummy” indicates that the destination address of this read is insignificant. NOTE: Step 2 is not required if 40h−43h contain 0000 0000 0000 0000h or FFFF FFFF FFFF FFFFh. 2. A 64-bit password (split as four 16-bit words) must be written to the data-memory locations 77F0h, 77F1h, 77F2h, and 77F3h. The four 16-bit words written to these locations must match the four words stored in 40h, 41h, 42h, and 43h (of program memory space), respectively. The device becomes “unsecured” one cycle after the last instruction that unsecures the part. Code Security Module Disclaimer The Code Security Module (“CSM”) included on this device was designed to password protect the data stored in the associated memory (either ROM or Flash) and is warranted by Texas Instruments (TI), in accordance with its standard terms and conditions, to conform to TI’s published specifications for the warranty period applicable for this device. TI DOES NOT, HOWEVER, WARRANT OR REPRESENT THAT THE CSM CANNOT BE COMPROMISED OR BREACHED OR THAT THE DATA STORED IN THE ASSOCIATED MEMORY CANNOT BE ACCESSED THROUGH OTHER MEANS. MOREOVER, EXCEPT AS SET FORTH ABOVE, TI MAKES NO WARRANTIES OR REPRESENTATIONS CONCERNING THE CSM OR OPERATION OF THIS DEVICE, INCLUDING ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 43 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 IN NO EVENT SHALL TI BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, OR PUNITIVE DAMAGES, HOWEVER CAUSED, ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF YOUR USE OF THE CSM OR THIS DEVICE, WHETHER OR NOT TI HAS BEEN ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGES. EXCLUDED DAMAGES INCLUDE, BUT ARE NOT LIMITED TO LOSS OF DATA, LOSS OF GOODWILL, LOSS OF USE OR INTERRUPTION OF BUSINESS OR OTHER ECONOMIC LOSS. 44 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 PERIPHERALS The integrated peripherals of the TMS320x240xA are described in the following subsections: D D D D D D D D D Two event-manager modules (EVA, EVB) Enhanced analog-to-digital converter (ADC) module Controller area network (CAN) module Serial communications interface (SCI) module Serial peripheral interface (SPI) module PLL-based clock module Digital I/O and shared pin functions External memory interfaces (LF2407A only) Watchdog (WD) timer module event manager modules (EVA, EVB) The event-manager modules include general-purpose (GP) timers, full-compare/PWM units, capture units, and quadrature-encoder pulse (QEP) circuits. EVA and EVB timers, compare units, and capture units function identically. However, timer/unit names differ for EVA and EVB. Table 7 shows the module and signal names used. Table 7 shows the features and functionality available for the event-manager modules and highlights EVA nomenclature. Event managers A and B have identical peripheral register sets with EVA starting at 7400h and EVB starting at 7500h. The paragraphs in this section describe the function of GP timers, compare units, capture units, and QEPs using EVA nomenclature. These paragraphs are applicable to EVB with regard to function—however, module/signal names would differ. Table 7. Module and Signal Names for EVA and EVB EVENT MANAGER MODULES EVA EVB MODULE SIGNAL MODULE SIGNAL Timer 1 Timer 2 T1PWM/T1CMP T2PWM/T2CMP Timer 3 Timer 4 T3PWM/T3CMP T4PWM/T4CMP Compare Units Compare 1 Compare 2 Compare 3 PWM1/2 PWM3/4 PWM5/6 Compare 4 Compare 5 Compare 6 PWM7/8 PWM9/10 PWM11/12 Capture Units Capture 1 Capture 2 Capture 3 CAP1 CAP2 CAP3 Capture 4 Capture 5 Capture 6 CAP4 CAP5 CAP6 QEP1 QEP2 QEP1 QEP2 QEP3 QEP4 QEP3 QEP4 Direction External Clock TDIRA TCLKINA Direction External Clock TDIRB TCLKINB GP Timers QEP External Inputs POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 45 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 event manager modules (EVA, EVB) (continued) 240xA DSP Core Data Bus 16 ADDR Bus Reset INT2,3,4 Clock 16 16 16 3 EV Control Registers and Control Logic ADC Start of Conversion Output Logic GP Timer 1 Compare T1PWM/ T1CMP TDIRA† 16 TCLKINA GP Timer 1 Prescaler 16 16 T1CON[4,5] Full-Compare Units 3 SVPWM State Machine CLKOUT (Internal) T1CON[8,9,10] PWM1 3 3 Deadband Units Output Logic PWM6 16 16 GP Timer 2 Compare T2PWM/ T2CMP Output Logic 16 TCLKINA Prescaler GP Timer 2 CLKOUT (Internal) T2CON[8,9,10] T2CON[4,5] TDIRA 16 DIR Clock QEP Circuit MUX CAPCONA[14,13] 2 16 2 Capture Units 2402A devices do not support external direction control. TDIR is not available. Figure 11. Event Manager A Block Diagram 46 CAP1/QEP1 CAP2/QEP2 CAP3 16 † 2 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 general-purpose (GP) timers There are two GP timers. The GP timer x (x = 1 or 2 for EVA; x = 3 or 4 for EVB) includes: D D D D D D D D A 16-bit timer, up-/down-counter, TxCNT, for reads or writes A 16-bit timer-compare register, TxCMPR (double-buffered with shadow register), for reads or writes A 16-bit timer-period register, TxPR (double-buffered with shadow register), for reads or writes A 16-bit timer-control register,TxCON, for reads or writes Selectable internal or external input clocks A programmable prescaler for internal or external clock inputs Control and interrupt logic, for four maskable interrupts: underflow, overflow, timer compare, and period interrupts A selectable direction input pin (TDIRx) (to count up or down when directional up- / down-count mode is selected) The GP timers can be operated independently or synchronized with each other. The compare register associated with each GP timer can be used for compare function and PWM-waveform generation. There are three continuous modes of operations for each GP timer in up- or up / down-counting operations. Internal or external input clocks with programmable prescaler are used for each GP timer. GP timers also provide the time base for the other event-manager submodules: GP timer 1 for all the compares and PWM circuits, GP timer 2/1 for the capture units and the quadrature-pulse counting operations. Double-buffering of the period and compare registers allows programmable change of the timer (PWM) period and the compare/PWM pulse width as needed. full-compare units There are three full-compare units on each event manager. These compare units use GP timer1 as the time base and generate six outputs for compare and PWM-waveform generation using programmable deadband circuit. The state of each of the six outputs is configured independently. The compare registers of the compare units are double-buffered, allowing programmable change of the compare/PWM pulse widths as needed. programmable deadband generator The deadband generator circuit includes three 8-bit counters and an 8-bit compare register. Desired deadband values (from 0 to 16 µs) can be programmed into the compare register for the outputs of the three compare units. The deadband generation can be enabled/disabled for each compare unit output individually. The deadband-generator circuit produces two outputs (with or without deadband zone) for each compare unit output signal. The output states of the deadband generator are configurable and changeable as needed by way of the double-buffered ACTR register. PWM waveform generation Up to eight PWM waveforms (outputs) can be generated simultaneously by each event manager: three independent pairs (six outputs) by the three full-compare units with programmable deadbands, and two independent PWMs by the GP-timer compares. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 47 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 PWM characteristics Characteristics of the PWMs are as follows: D D D D D D D D D 16-bit registers Programmable deadband for the PWM output pairs, from 0 to 12 µs Minimum deadband width of 25 ns Change of the PWM carrier frequency for PWM frequency wobbling as needed Change of the PWM pulse widths within and after each PWM period as needed External-maskable power and drive-protection interrupts Pulse-pattern-generator circuit, for programmable generation of asymmetric, symmetric, and four-space vector PWM waveforms Minimized CPU overhead using auto-reload of the compare and period registers The PWM pins are driven to a high-impedance state when the PDPINTx pin is driven low and after PDPINTx signal qualification. The PDPINTx pin (after qualification) is reflected in bit 8 of the COMCONx register. − PDPINTA pin status is reflected in bit 8 of COMCONA register. − PDPINTB pin status is reflected in bit 8 of COMCONB register. capture unit The capture unit provides a logging function for different events or transitions. The values of the selected GP timer counter is captured and stored in the two-level-deep FIFO stacks when selected transitions are detected on capture input pins, CAPx (x = 1, 2, or 3 for EVA; and x = 4, 5, or 6 for EVB). The capture unit consists of three capture circuits. Capture units include the following features: D D D D D One 16-bit capture control register, CAPCONx (R/W) D D User-specified transition (rising edge, falling edge, or both edges) detection One 16-bit capture FIFO status register, CAPFIFOx Selection of GP timer 1/2 (for EVA) or 3/4 (for EVB) as the time base Three 16-bit 2-level-deep FIFO stacks, one for each capture unit Three capture input pins (CAP1/2/3 for EVA, CAP4/5/6 for EVB)—one input pin per capture unit. [All inputs are synchronized with the device (CPU) clock. In order for a transition to be captured, the input must hold at its current level to meet two rising edges of the device clock. The input pins CAP1/2 and CAP4/5 can also be used as QEP inputs to the QEP circuit.] Three maskable interrupt flags, one for each capture unit quadrature-encoder pulse (QEP) circuit Two capture inputs (CAP1 and CAP2 for EVA; CAP4 and CAP5 for EVB) can be used to interface the on-chip QEP circuit with a quadrature encoder pulse. Full synchronization of these inputs is performed on-chip. Direction or leading-quadrature pulse sequence is detected, and GP timer 2/4 is incremented or decremented by the rising and falling edges of the two input signals (four times the frequency of either input pulse). 48 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 input qualifier circuitry An input-qualifier circuitry qualifies the input signal to the CAP1−6, QEP1−4, XINT1/2, ADCSOC and PDPINTA/B pins in the 240xA devices. (The I/O functions of these pins do not use the input-qualifier circuitry). The state of the internal input signal will change only after the pin is high/low for 6(12) clock edges. This ensures that a glitch smaller than 5(11) CLKOUT cycles wide will not change the internal pin input state. The user must hold the pin high/low for 6(12) cycles to ensure the device will see the level change. Bit 6 of the SCSR2 register controls whether 6 clock edges (bit 6 = 0) or 12 clock edges (bit 6 = 1) are used to block 5- or 11-cycle glitches. On the LC2402A, input qualification is for the CAP1, CAP2, CAP3, PDPINTA, and XINT2/ADCSOC pins. enhanced analog-to-digital converter (ADC) module A simplified functional block diagram of the ADC module is shown in Figure 12. The ADC module consists of a 10-bit ADC with a built-in sample-and-hold (S / H) circuit. Functions of the ADC module include: D D D 10-bit ADC core with built-in S/H D Sequencer can be operated as two independent 8-state sequencers or as one large 16-state sequencer (i.e., two cascaded 8-state sequencers) D Sixteen result registers (individually addressable) to store conversion values 16-channel, MUXed inputs Autosequencing capability provides up to 16 “autoconversions” in a single session. Each conversion can be programmed to select any 1 of 16 input channels − The digital value of the input analog voltage is derived by: when input ≤ VREFLO Digital Value = 0 Digital Value + 1024 Input Analog Voltage * V REFLO V REFHI * V REFLO when input ≥ VREFHI Digital Value = 1023 Note: D when VREFLO < input < VREFHI All fractional values are truncated. Multiple triggers as sources for the start-of-conversion (SOC) sequence − S/W − software immediate start − EVA − Event manager A (multiple event sources within EVA) − EVB − Event manager B (multiple event sources within EVB) − Ext − External pin (ADCSOC) D D Flexible interrupt control allows interrupt request on every end-of-sequence (EOS) or every other EOS D D EVA and EVB triggers can operate independently in dual-sequencer mode Sequencer can operate in “start/stop” mode, allowing multiple “time-sequenced triggers” to synchronize conversions Sample-and-hold (S/H) acquisition time window has separate prescale control NOTE: The calibration and self-test features are not present in 240xA devices. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 49 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 enhanced analog-to-digital converter (ADC) module (continued) The ADC module in the 240xA has been enhanced to provide flexible interface to event managers A and B. The ADC interface is built around a fast, 10-bit ADC module with a total minimum conversion time of 375 ns (S/H + conversion). The ADC module has 16 channels, configurable as two independent 8-channel modules to service event managers A and B. The two independent 8-channel modules can be cascaded to form a 16-channel module. Although there are multiple input channels and two sequencers, there is only one converter in the ADC module. Figure 12 shows the block diagram of the 240xA ADC module. The two 8-channel modules have the capability to autosequence a series of conversions, each module has the choice of selecting any one of the respective eight channels available through an analog MUX. In the cascaded mode, the autosequencer functions as a single 16-channel sequencer. On each sequencer, once the conversion is complete, the selected channel value is stored in its respective RESULT register. Autosequencing allows the system to convert the same channel multiple times, allowing the user to perform oversampling algorithms. This gives increased resolution over traditional single-sampled conversion results. Result Registers Analog MUX Result Reg 0 ADCIN00 70A8h Result Reg 1 10-Bit ADC Module (375 ns MIN) ADCIN07 ADCIN08 ADCIN15 Result Reg 7 70AFh Result Reg 8 70B0h Result Reg 15 70B7h ADC Control Registers S/W EVA SOC Sequencer 1 Sequencer 2 SOC ADCSOC S/W EVB Figure 12. Block Diagram of the 240xA ADC Module To obtain the specified accuracy of the ADC, proper board layout is very critical. To the best extent possible, traces leading to the ADCINn pins should not run in close proximity to the digital signal paths. This is to minimize switching noise on the digital lines from getting coupled to the ADC inputs. Furthermore, proper isolation techniques must be used to isolate the ADC module power pins (such as VCCA, VREFHI, and VSSA) from the digital supply. 50 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 controller area network (CAN) module The CAN module is a full-CAN controller designed as a 16-bit peripheral module and supports the following features: D CAN specification 2.0B (active) − − D Six mailboxes for objects of 0- to 8-byte data length − − D D D D D D Standard data and remote frames Extended data and remote frames Two receive mailboxes, two transmit mailboxes Two configurable transmit/receive mailboxes Local acceptance mask registers for mailboxes 0 and 1 and mailboxes 2 and 3 Configurable standard or extended message identifier Programmable bit rate Programmable interrupt scheme Readable error counters Self-test mode − In this mode, the CAN module operates in a loop-back fashion, receiving its own transmitted message. The CAN module is a 16-bit peripheral. The accesses are split into the control/status-registers accesses and the mailbox-RAM accesses. CAN peripheral registers: The CPU can access the CAN peripheral registers only using 16-bit write accesses. The CAN peripheral always presents full 16-bit data to the CPU bus during read cycles. CAN controller architecture Figure 13 shows the basic architecture of the CAN controller through this block diagram of the CAN Peripherals. CAN Module Transmit Buffer Control/Status Registers Interrupt Logic CANTX Control Bus CPU Interface/ Memory Management Unit CPU CAN CAN Core Transceiver CANRX R R T/R T/R T T Temporary Receive Buffer mailbox 0 mailbox 1 mailbox 2 mailbox 3 mailbox 4 mailbox 5 RAM 48x16 Data ID Matchid Control Logic Acceptance Filter Figure 13. CAN Module Block Diagram POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 51 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 controller area network (CAN) module (continued) The mailboxes are situated in one 48-word x 16-bit RAM. It can be written to or read by the CPU or the CAN. The CAN write or read access, as well as the CPU read access, needs one clock cycle. The CPU write access needs two clock cycles. In these two clock cycles, the CAN performs a read-modify-write cycle and, therefore, inserts one wait state for the CPU. Address bit 0 of the address bus used when accessing the RAM decides if the lower (0) or the higher (1) 16-bit word of the 32-bit word is taken. The RAM location is determined by the upper bits 5 to 1 of the address bus. Table 8. 3.3-V CAN Transceivers for the TMS320Lx240xA DSPs † PART NUMBER LOW-POWER MODE INTEGRATED SLOPE CONTROL Vref PIN SN65HVD230 370 µA standby mode Yes Yes SN65HVD231 40 nA sleep mode Yes Yes SN65HVD232 No standby or sleep mode No No TA MARKED AS† VP230 −40°C 40 C to 85 85°C C VP231 VP232 This is the nomenclature printed on the device, since the footprint is too small to accommodate the entire part number. CAN interrupt logic There are two interrupt requests from the CAN module to the peripheral interrupt expansion (PIE) controller: the mailbox interrupt and the error interrupt. Both interrupts can assert either a high-priority request or a low-priority request to the CPU. Since CAN mailboxes can generate multiple interrupts, the software should read the CAN_IFR register for every interrupt and prioritize the interrupt service, or else, these multiple interrupts will not be recognized by the CPU and PIE hardware logic. Each interrupt routine should service all the interrupt bits that are set and clear them after service. 52 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 serial communications interface (SCI) module The 240xA devices include a serial communications interface (SCI) module. The SCI module supports digital communications between the CPU and other asynchronous peripherals that use the standard non-return-to-zero (NRZ) format. The SCI receiver and transmitter are double-buffered, and each has its own separate enable and interrupt bits. Both can be operated independently or simultaneously in the full-duplex mode. To ensure data integrity, the SCI checks received data for break detection, parity, overrun, and framing errors. The bit rate is programmable to over 65 000 different speeds through a 16-bit baud-select register. Features of the SCI module include: D Two external pins: − − SCITXD: SCI transmit-output pin SCIRXD: SCI receive-input pin NOTE: Both pins can be used as GPIO if not used for SCI. D Baud rate programmable to 64K different rates − D Data-word format − − − − D D D D D D D D Up to 2500 Kbps at 40-MHz CPUCLK One start bit Data-word length programmable from one to eight bits Optional even/odd/no parity bit One or two stop bits Four error-detection flags: parity, overrun, framing, and break detection Two wake-up multiprocessor modes: idle-line and address bit Half- or full-duplex operation Double-buffered receive and transmit functions Transmitter and receiver operations can be accomplished through interrupt-driven or polled algorithms with status flags. − Transmitter: TXRDY flag (transmitter-buffer register is ready to receive another character) and TX EMPTY flag (transmitter-shift register is empty) − Receiver: RXRDY flag (receiver-buffer register is ready to receive another character), BRKDT flag (break condition occurred), and RX ERROR flag (monitoring four interrupt conditions) Separate enable bits for transmitter and receiver interrupts (except BRKDT) NRZ (non-return-to-zero) format Ten SCI module control registers located in the control register frame beginning at address 7050h NOTE: All registers in this module are 8-bit registers that are connected to the 16-bit peripheral bus. When a register is accessed, the register data is in the lower byte (7 −0), and the upper byte (15 −8) is read as zeros. Writing to the upper byte has no effect. Figure 14 shows the SCI module block diagram. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 53 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 serial communications interface (SCI) module (continued) TXWAKE Frame Format and Mode SCICTL1.3 SCITXBUF.7−0 Transmitter-Data Buffer Register Parity Even/Odd Enable SCICCR.6 SCICCR.5 SCI TX Interrupt TXRDY TX INT ENA SCICTL2.7 TX EMPTY 8 TXINT SCICTL2.0 External Connections SCICTL2.6 WUT TXENA TXSHF Register SCITXD SCITXD SCICTL1.1 SCIHBAUD. 15 −8 SCI Priority Level 1 Level 5 Int. 0 Level 1 Int. SCI TX Priority Baud Rate MSbyte Register Internal Clock SCILBAUD. 7 −0 SCIPRI.6 Baud Rate LSbyte Register Level 5 Int. 1 0 Level 1 Int. SCI RX Priority SCIPRI.5 RXENA RX ERR INT ENA SCICTL1.6 RX Error SCIRXST.7 SCIRXST.4 −2 RX Error FE OE PE SCIRXD SCICTL1.0 8 Receiver-Data Buffer Register SCIRXBUF.7−0 SCI RX Interrupt RXRDY SCIRXST.6 BRKDT SCIRXST.5 RX/BK INT ENA SCICTL2.1 RXINT RXWAKE SCIRXST.1 SCIRXD RXSHF Register Figure 14. Serial Communications Interface (SCI) Module Block Diagram 54 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 serial peripheral interface (SPI) module Some 240xA devices include the four-pin serial peripheral interface (SPI) module. The SPI is a high-speed, synchronous serial I/O port that allows a serial bit stream of programmed length (one to sixteen bits) to be shifted into and out of the device at a programmable bit-transfer rate. Normally, the SPI is used for communications between the DSP controller and external peripherals or another processor. Typical applications include external I/O or peripheral expansion through devices such as shift registers, display drivers, and ADCs. Multidevice communications are supported by the master/slave operation of the SPI. The SPI module features include: D Four external pins: − SPISOMI: SPI slave-output/master-input pin − SPISIMO: SPI slave-input/master-output pin − SPISTE: SPI slave transmit-enable pin − SPICLK: SPI serial-clock pin NOTE: All four pins can be used as GPIO, if the SPI module is not used. D D D D D D D Two operational modes: master and slave Baud rate: 125 different programmable rates / 10 Mbps at 40-MHz CPUCLK Data word length: one to sixteen data bits Four clocking schemes (controlled by clock polarity and clock phase bits) include: − Falling edge without phase delay: SPICLK active high. SPI transmits data on the falling edge of the SPICLK signal and receives data on the rising edge of the SPICLK signal. − Falling edge with phase delay: SPICLK active high. SPI transmits data one half-cycle ahead of the falling edge of the SPICLK signal and receives data on the falling edge of the SPICLK signal. − Rising edge without phase delay: SPICLK inactive low. SPI transmits data on the rising edge of the SPICLK signal and receives data on the falling edge of the SPICLK signal. − Rising edge with phase delay: SPICLK inactive low. SPI transmits data one half-cycle ahead of the falling edge of the SPICLK signal and receives data on the rising edge of the SPICLK signal. Simultaneous receive and transmit operation (transmit function can be disabled in software) Transmitter and receiver operations are accomplished through either interrupt-driven or polled algorithms. Nine SPI module control registers: Located in control register frame beginning at address 7040h. NOTE: All registers in this module are 16-bit registers that are connected to the 16-bit peripheral bus. When a register is accessed, the register data is in the lower byte (7 −0), and the upper byte (15 −8) is read as zeros. Writing to the upper byte has no effect. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 55 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 serial peripheral interface (SPI) module (continued) Figure 15 is a block diagram of the SPI in slave mode. SPIRXBUF.15 −0 Receiver Overrun Flag SPIRXBUF Buffer Register Overrun INT ENA SPISTS.7 0 Level 1 INT 1 Level 5 INT SPIPRI.6 To CPU SPICTL.4 SPITXBUF.15 −0 SPI Priority 16 SPITXBUF Buffer Register SPI INT FLAG SPI INT ENA External Connections SPISTS.6 16 SPICTL.0 M M SPIDAT Data Register S SW1 S M M SPIDAT.15 −0 S SW2 S SPISIMO SPISOMI Talk SPICTL.1 SPISTE† State Control Master/Slave SPICCR.3 −0 SPI Char 3 2 1 0 SW3 M SPI Bit Rate Internal Clock SPIBRR.6 −0 6 5 4 3 2 SPICTL.2 S 1 S M 0 Clock Polarity Clock Phase SPICCR.6 SPICTL.3 SPICLK NOTE A: The diagram is shown in the slave mode. † The SPISTE pin is driven low externally. Note that SW1, SW2, and SW3 are closed in this configuration. See the following errata for restrictions on using the SPISTE pin: TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A DSP Controllers Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ002) TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2402A DSP Controllers Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ185) Figure 15. Four-Pin Serial Peripheral Interface Module Block Diagram 56 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 SPI slave mode operation in LF2403A The LF2403A device does not have the SPISTE/IOPC5 pin. (This function is available as an internal signal only.) The following must be done to put the LF2403A SPI in slave mode: 1. Configure SPISTE/IOPC5 signal for GPIO mode by clearing the MCRB.5 bit. 2. Configure SPISTE/IOPC5 signal as an output (by writing a 1 to bit 13 of PCDATDIR) and drive it low (by writing a 0 to bit 5 of PCDATDIR). Note that SPISTE/IOPC5 should not be driven low until after the SPI is configured and taken out of reset. NOTE: The slave SPISTE/IOPC5 signal must not be driven low until after the master and slave SPI modules are configured and taken out of reset. The initialization sequence is as follows: a. The master SPI is configured first and taken out of reset. This ensures that the master SPICLK is initialized to its appropriate level (high or low, depending on the polarity bit) first, before the slave SPI starts accepting clock pulses. b. The slave SPI is configured and taken out of reset. c. The GPIO/SPI pins of the slave is then configured for SPI operation and the SPISTE/IOPC5 signal is driven low. This is done after ensuring the correct level of the master SPICLK signal. One method of doing this would be to read the level of the SPICLK pin through the PCDATDIR register and then deciding on the appropriate course of action. d. SPI transmission may commence now. Transmission of data should not be attempted until both master and slave are configured and the slave SPISTE/IOPC5 signal is driven low. PLL-based clock module The 240xA has an on-chip, PLL-based clock module. This module provides all the necessary clocking signals for the device, as well as control for low-power mode entry. The PLL has a 3-bit ratio control to select different CPU clock rates. See Figure 16 for the PLL Clock Module Block Diagram, Table 9 for clock rates, and Table 10 for the loop filter component values. The PLL-based clock module provides two modes of operation: D Crystal-operation This mode allows the use of an external crystal/resonator to provide the time base to the device. D External clock source operation This mode allows the internal oscillator to be bypassed. The device clocks are generated from an external clock source input on the XTAL1/CLKIN pin. In this case, an external oscillator clock is connected to the XTAL1/CLKIN pin. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 57 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 PLL-based clock module (continued) XTAL1/CLKIN Cb1 RESONATOR/ CRYSTAL XTAL2 Fin Cb2 PLL CLKOUT PLLF R1 C2 XTAL OSC 3-bit PLL Select (SCSR1.[11:9]) C1 PLLF2 Figure 16. PLL Clock Module Block Diagram Table 9. PLL Clock Selection Through Bits (11−9) in SCSR1 Register CLK PS2 CLK PS1 CLK PS0 CLKOUT 0 0 0 4 × Fin 0 0 1 2 × Fin 0 1 0 1.33 × Fin 0 1 1 1 × Fin 1 0 0 0.8 × Fin 1 0 1 0.66 × Fin 1 1 0 0.57 × Fin 1 1 1 0.5 × Fin Default multiplication factor after reset is (1,1,1), i.e., 0.5 × Fin. NOTE: The bootloader sets the PLL to x2 or x4 option. If the bootloader is used, the value of CLKIN used should not force CLKOUT to exceed the maximum rated device speed. See the “Boot ROM” section for more details. external reference crystal clock option The internal oscillator is enabled by connecting a crystal across the XTAL1/CLKIN and XTAL2 pins as shown in Figure 17a. The crystal should be in fundamental operation and parallel resonant, with an effective series resistance of 30 Ω −150 Ω and draws no more than 1 mW; it should be specified at a load capacitance of 20 pF. NOTE: Lx240xA crystal biasing needs an external 1 MΩ resistor across X1 and X2 pins for reliable operation. See the TMS320LF2407A, LF2406A, LF2403A, LF2402A DSP Controllers Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ002) or the TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2402A DSP Controllers Silicon Errata (literature number SPRZ185) for details on this requirement. external reference oscillator clock option The internal oscillator is disabled by connecting a clock signal to XTAL1/CLKIN and leaving the XTAL2 input pin unconnected as shown in part b of Figure 17. 58 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 external reference oscillator clock option (continued) XTAL1/CLKIN XTAL2 Crystal XTAL1/CLKIN XTAL2 External Clock Signal (Toggling 0 −3.3 V) NC Cb2 (see Note A) Cb1 (see Note A) (a) (b) NOTE A: TI recommends that customers have the resonator/crystal vendor characterize the operation of their device with the DSP chip. The resonator/crystal vendor has the equipment and expertise to tune the tank circuit. The vendor can also advise the customer regarding the proper tank component values that will ensure start-up and stability over the entire operating range. Figure 17. Recommended Crystal / Clock Connection loop filter The PLL module uses an external loop filter circuit for jitter minimization. The components for the loop filter circuit are R1, C1, and C2. The capacitors (C1 and C2) must be non-polarized. This loop filter circuit is connected between the PLLF and PLLF2 pins (see Figure 16). For examples of component values of R1, C1, and C2 at a specified oscillator frequency (XTAL1), see Table 10. Table 10. Loop Filter Component Values With Damping Factor = 2.0 XTAL1/CLKIN FREQUENCY (MHz) R1 (Ω) (± 5% TOLERANCE) C1 (µF) (± 20% TOLERANCE) C2 (µF) (± 20% TOLERANCE) 4 4.7 3.9 0.082 5 5.6 2.7 0.056 6 6.8 1.8 0.039 7 8.2 1.5 0.033 8 9.1 1 0.022 9 10 0.82 0.015 10 11 0.68 0.015 0.012 11 12 0.56 12 13 0.47 0.01 13 15 0.39 0.0082 14 15 0.33 0.0068 15 16 0.33 0.0068 16 18 0.27 0.0056 17 18 0.22 0.0047 18 20 0.22 0.0047 19 22 0.18 0.0039 20 24 0.15 0.0033 low-power modes The 240xA has an IDLE instruction. When executed, the IDLE instruction stops the clocks to all circuits in the CPU, but the clock output from the CPU continues to run. With this instruction, the CPU clocks can be shut down to save power while the peripherals (clocked with CLKOUT) continue to run. The CPU exits the IDLE state if it is reset, or, if it receives an interrupt request. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 59 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 clock domains All 240xA-based devices have two clock domains: 1. CPU clock domain − consists of the clock for most of the CPU logic 2. System clock domain − consists of the peripheral clock (which is derived from CLKOUT of the CPU) and the clock for the interrupt logic in the CPU. When the CPU goes into IDLE mode, the CPU clock domain is stopped while the system clock domain continues to run. This mode is also known as IDLE1 mode. The 240xA CPU also contains support for a second IDLE mode, IDLE2. By asserting IDLE2 to the 240xA CPU, both the CPU clock domain and the system clock domain are stopped, allowing further power savings. A third low-power mode, HALT mode, the deepest, is possible if the oscillator and WDCLK are also shut down when in IDLE2 mode. Two control bits, LPM1 and LPM0, specify which of the three possible low-power modes is entered when the IDLE instruction is executed (see Table 11). These bits are located in the System Control and Status Register 1 (SCSR1), and they are described in the TMS320LF/LC240xA DSP Controllers Reference Guide: System and Peripherals (literature number SPRU357). Table 11. Low-Power Modes Summary LOW-POWER MODE LPMx BITS SCSR1 [13:12] CPU CLOCK DOMAIN SYSTEM CLOCK DOMAIN WDCLK STATUS PLL STATUS OSC STATUS FLASH POWER EXIT CONDITION CPU running normally XX On On On On On On — On Peripheral Interrupt, External Interrupt, Reset, PDPINTA/B IDLE1 − (LPM0) † 00 Off On On On On IDLE2 − (LPM1) 01 Off Off On On On On Wakeup Interrupts, External Interrupt, Reset, PDPINTA/B HALT − (LPM2) [PLL/OSC power down] 1X Off Off Off Off Off Off† Reset, PDPINTA/B The Flash must be powered down by the user code prior to entering LPM2. For more details, see the TMS320LF/LC240xA DSP Controllers Reference Guide: System and Peripherals (literature number SPRU357). other power-down options 240xA devices have clock-enable bits to the following on-chip peripherals: ADC, SCI, SPI, CAN, EVB, and EVA. Clock to these peripherals are disabled after reset; thus, start-up power can be low for the device. Depending on the application, these peripherals can be turned on/off to achieve low power. See the SCSR1 register for details on the peripheral clock enable bits. digital I/O and shared pin functions The 240xA has up to 41 general-purpose, bidirectional, digital I/O (GPIO) pins—most of which are shared between primary functions and I/O. Most I/O pins of the 240xA are shared with other functions. The digital I/O ports module provides a flexible method for controlling both dedicated I/O and shared pin functions. All I/O and shared pin functions are controlled using eight 16-bit registers. These registers are divided into two types: 60 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 digital I/O and shared pin functions (continued) D Output Control Registers — used to control the multiplexer selection that chooses between the primary function of a pin or the general-purpose I/O function. D Data and Control Registers — used to control the data and data direction of bidirectional I/O pins. description of shared I/O pins The control structure for shared I/O pins is shown in Figure 18, where each pin has three bits that define its operation: D D MUX control bit — this bit selects between the primary function (1) and I/O function (0) of the pin. D I/O data bit — if the I/O function is selected for the pin (MUX control bit is set to 0) and the direction selected is an input, data is read from this bit; if the direction selected is an output, data is written to this bit. I/O direction bit — if the I/O function is selected for the pin (MUX control bit is set to 0), this bit determines whether the pin is an input (0) or an output (1). The MUX control bit, I/O direction bit, and I/O data bit are in the I/O control registers. IOP Data Bit (Read/Write) In Primary Function (Output Section) Primary Function (Input Section) Out IOP DIR Bit 0 = Input 1 = Output 0 1 MUX Control Bit 0 = I/O Function 1 = Primary Function Pullup or Pulldown (Internal) Primary Function or I/O Pin Pin Figure 18. Shared Pin Configuration A summary of shared pin configurations and associated bits is shown in Table 12. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 61 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 description of shared I/O pins (continued) Table 12. Shared Pin Configurations† (MCRx.n = 1) Primary Function (MCRX.N = 0) I/O MUX CONTROL REGISTER (name.bit #) SCITXD IOPA0 MCRA.0 0 SCIRXD IOPA1 MCRA.1 XINT1 IOPA2 MCRA.2 CAP1/QEP1 IOPA3 CAP2/QEP2 IOPA4 PIN FUNCTION SELECTED I/O PORT DATA AND DIRECTION‡ MUX CONTROL VALUE AT RESET (MCRx.n) REGISTER DATA BIT NO.§ DIR BIT NO.¶ PADATDIR 0 8 0 PADATDIR 1 9 0 PADATDIR 2 10 MCRA.3 0 PADATDIR 3 11 MCRA.4 0 PADATDIR 4 12 PORT A CAP3 IOPA5 MCRA.5 0 PADATDIR 5 13 PWM1 IOPA6 MCRA.6 0 PADATDIR 6 14 PWM2 IOPA7 MCRA.7 0 PADATDIR 7 15 PWM3 IOPB0 MCRA.8 0 PBDATDIR 0 8 PWM4 IOPB1 MCRA.9 0 PBDATDIR 1 9 PWM5 IOPB2 MCRA.10 0 PBDATDIR 2 10 PORT B PWM6 IOPB3 MCRA.11 0 PBDATDIR 3 11 T1PWM/T1CMP IOPB4 MCRA.12 0 PBDATDIR 4 12 T2PWM/T2CMP IOPB5 MCRA.13 0 PBDATDIR 5 13 TDIRA IOPB6 MCRA.14 0 PBDATDIR 6 14 TCLKINA IOPB7 MCRA.15 0 PBDATDIR 7 15 8 PORT C W/R # IOPC0 MCRB.0 1 PCDATDIR 0 BIO IOPC1 MCRB.1 1 PCDATDIR 1 9 SPISIMO IOPC2 MCRB.2 0 PCDATDIR 2 10 SPISOMI IOPC3 MCRB.3 0 PCDATDIR 3 11 SPICLK IOPC4 MCRB.4 0 PCDATDIR 4 12 SPISTE IOPC5 MCRB.5 0 PCDATDIR 5 13 CANTX IOPC6 MCRB.6 0 PCDATDIR 6 14 CANRX IOPC7 MCRB.7 0 PCDATDIR 7 15 PORT D XINT2/ADCSOC IOPD0 MCRB.8 0 PDDATDIR 0 8 EMU0 Reserved MCRB.9|| 1 PDDATDIR 1 9 EMU1 Reserved MCRB.10|| 1 PDDATDIR 2 10 TCK Reserved MCRB.11|| 1 PDDATDIR 3 11 TDI Reserved MCRB.12|| 1 PDDATDIR 4 12 TDO Reserved MCRB.13|| 1 PDDATDIR 5 13 TMS Reserved MCRB.14|| 1 PDDATDIR 6 14 TMS2 Reserved MCRB.15|| 1 PDDATDIR 7 15 † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin functions at reset. ‡ Valid only if the I/O function is selected on the pin § If the GPIO pin is configured as an output, these bits can be written to. If the pin is configured as an input, these bits are read from. ¶ If the DIR bit is 0, the GPIO pin functions as an input. For a value of 1, the pin is configured as an output. # At reset, all LF240xA devices come up with the W/R/IOPC0 pin in W/R mode. On devices that lack an external memory interface (e.g., LF2406A), W/R mode is not functional and MCRB.0 must be set to a 0 if the IOPC0 pin is to be used. The XMIF Hi-Z control bit (bit 4 of the SCSR2 register) is reserved in these devices and must be written with a zero. || Bits 15 through 9 of the MCRB register must be written as 1 only. Writing a 0 to any of these bits will cause unpredictable operation of the device. 62 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 description of shared I/O pins (continued) Table 12. Shared Pin Configurations† (Continued) PIN FUNCTION SELECTED (MCRx.n = 1) Primary Function (MCRX.N = 0) I/O MUX CONTROL REGISTER (name.bit #) MUX CONTROL VALUE AT RESET (MCRx.n) I/O PORT DATA AND DIRECTION‡ REGISTER DATA BIT NO.§ DIR BIT NO.¶ 8 PORT E CLKOUT IOPE0 MCRC.0 1 PEDATDIR 0 PWM7 IOPE1 MCRC.1 0 PEDATDIR 1 9 PWM8 IOPE2 MCRC.2 0 PEDATDIR 2 10 PWM9 IOPE3 MCRC.3 0 PEDATDIR 3 11 PWM10 IOPE4 MCRC.4 0 PEDATDIR 4 12 PWM11 IOPE5 MCRC.5 0 PEDATDIR 5 13 PWM12 IOPE6 MCRC.6 0 PEDATDIR 6 14 CAP4/QEP3 IOPE7 MCRC.7 0 PEDATDIR 7 15 CAP5/QEP4 IOPF0 MCRC.8 0 PFDATDIR 0 8 CAP6 IOPF1 MCRC.9 0 PFDATDIR 1 9 T3PWM/T3CMP IOPF2 MCRC.10 0 PFDATDIR 2 10 T4PWM/T4CMP IOPF3 MCRC.11 0 PFDATDIR 3 11 TDIRB IOPF4 MCRC.12 0 PFDATDIR 4 12 TCLKINB IOPF5 MCRC.13 0 PFDATDIR 5 13 PORT F † Bold, italicized pin names indicate pin functions at reset. ‡ Valid only if the I/O function is selected on the pin § If the GPIO pin is configured as an output, these bits can be written to. If the pin is configured as an input, these bits are read from. ¶ If the DIR bit is 0, the GPIO pin functions as an input. For a value of 1, the pin is configured as an output. # At reset, all LF240xA devices come up with the W/R/IOPC0 pin in W/R mode. On devices that lack an external memory interface (e.g., LF2406A), W/R mode is not functional and MCRB.0 must be set to a 0 if the IOPC0 pin is to be used. The XMIF Hi-Z control bit (bit 4 of the SCSR2 register) is reserved in these devices and must be written with a zero. || Bits 15 through 9 of the MCRB register must be written as 1 only. Writing a 0 to any of these bits will cause unpredictable operation of the device. digital I/O control registers Table 13 lists the registers available in the digital I/O module. As with other 240xA peripherals, these registers are memory-mapped to the data space. Table 13. Addresses of Digital I/O Control Registers ADDRESS REGISTER NAME 7090h MCRA I/O MUX control register A 7092h MCRB I/O mux control register B 7094h MCRC I/O mux control register C 7095h PEDATDIR I/O port E data and direction register 7096h PFDATDIR I/O port F data and direction register 7098h PADATDIR I/O port A data and direction register 709Ah PBDATDIR I/O port B data and direction register 709Ch PCDATDIR I/O port C data and direction register 709Eh PDDATDIR I/O port D data and direction register POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 63 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 external memory interface (LF2407A) The TMS320LF2407A can address up to 64K × 16 words of memory (or registers) in each of the program, data, and I / O spaces. On-chip memory, when enabled, occupies some of this off-chip range. The CPU of the TMS320LF2407A schedules a program fetch, data read, and data write on the same machine cycle. This is because from on-chip memory, the CPU can execute all three of these operations in the same cycle. However, the external interface multiplexes the internal buses to one address bus and one data bus. The external interface sequences these operations to complete first the data write, then the data read, and finally the program read. The LF2407A supports a wide range of system interfacing requirements. Program, data, and I/O address spaces provide interface to memory and I/O, thereby maximizing system throughput. The full 16-bit address and data buses, along with the PS, DS, and IS space-select signals, allow addressing of 64K 16-bit words in program, data, and I/O space. Since on-chip peripheral registers occupy positions of data-memory space (7000−7FFF), the externally addressable data-memory space is 32K 16-bit words (8000−FFFF). Note that the global memory space of the C2xx core is not used for 240xA DSP devices. Therefore, the global memory allocation register (GREG) is reserved for all these devices. Input/output (I/O) design is simplified by having I/O space treated the same way as memory. I/O devices are accessed in the I/O address space using the processor’s external address and data buses in the same manner as memory-mapped devices. The LF2407A external parallel interface provides various control signals to facilitate interfacing to the device. The R/ W output signal is provided to indicate whether the current cycle is a read or a write. The STRB output signal provides a timing reference for all external cycles. For convenience, the device also provides the RD and the WE output signals, which indicate a read cycle and a write cycle, respectively, along with timing information for those cycles. The availability of these signals minimizes external gating necessary for interfacing external devices to the LF2407A. The 2407A provides RD and W/R signals to help the zero-wait-state external memory interface. At higher CLKOUT speeds, RD may not meet the slow memory device’s timing. In such instances, the W/R signal could be used as an alternative signal with some tradeoffs. See the timing parameters for details. The TMS320LF2407A supports zero-wait-state reads on the external interface. However, to avoid bus conflicts, writes take two cycles. This allows the TMS320LF2407A to buffer the transition of the data bus from input to output (or from output to input) by a half cycle. In most systems, the TMS320LF2407A ratio of reads to writes is significantly large to minimize the overhead of the extra cycle on writes. wait-state generation (LF2407A only) Wait-state generation is incorporated in the LF2407A without any external hardware for interfacing the LF2407A with slower off-chip memory and I/O devices. Adding wait states lengthens the time the CPU waits for external memory or an external I/O port to respond when the CPU reads from or writes to that external memory or I/O port. Specifically, the CPU waits one extra cycle (one CLKOUT cycle) for every wait state. The wait states operate on CLKOUT cycle boundaries. To avoid bus conflicts, writes from the LF2407A always take at least two CLKOUT cycles. The LF2407A offers two options for generating wait states: 64 D READY Signal. With the READY signal, you can externally generate any number of wait states. The READY pin has no effect on accesses to internal memory. D On-Chip Wait-State Generator. With this generator, you can generate zero to seven wait states. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 generating wait states with the READY signal When the READY signal is low, the LF2407A waits one CLKOUT cycle and then checks READY again. The LF2407A does not continue executing until the READY signal is driven high; therefore, if the READY signal is not used, it should be pulled high. The READY pin can be used to generate any number of wait states. However, when the LF2407A operates at full speed, it may not respond fast enough to provide a READY-based wait state for the first cycle. For extended wait states using external READY logic, the on-chip wait-state generator should be programmed to generate at least one wait state. generating wait states with the LF2407A on-chip software wait-state generator The software wait-state generator can be programmed to generate zero to seven wait states for a given off-chip memory space (program, data, or I/O), regardless of the state of the READY signal. These zero to seven wait states are controlled by the wait-state generator register (WSGR) (I/O FFFFh). For more detailed information on the WSGR and associated bit functions, see the TMS320LF/LC240xA DSP Controllers Reference Guide: System and Peripherals (literature number SPRU357). watchdog (WD) timer module The x240xA devices include a watchdog (WD) timer module. The WD function of this module monitors software and hardware operation by generating a system reset if it is not periodically serviced by software by having the correct key written. The WD timer operates independently of the CPU. It does not need any CPU initialization to function. When a system reset occurs, the WD timer defaults to the fastest WD timer rate available (WDCLK signal = CLKOUT/512). As soon as reset is released internally, the CPU starts executing code, and the WD timer begins incrementing. This means that, to avoid a premature reset, WD setup should occur early in the power-up sequence. See Figure 19 for a block diagram of the WD module. The WD module features include the following: D WD Timer − Seven different WD overflow rates − A WD-reset key (WDKEY) register that clears the WD counter when a correct value is written, and generates a system reset if an incorrect value is written to the register − WD check bits that initiate a system reset if an incorrect value is written to the WD control register (WDCR) D Automatic activation of the WD timer, once system reset is released − Three WD control registers located in control register frame beginning at address 7020h. NOTE: All registers in this module are 8-bit registers. When a register is accessed, the register data is in the lower byte, the upper byte is read as zeros. Writing to the upper byte has no effect. Figure 19 shows the WD block diagram. Table 14 shows the different WD overflow (time-out) selections. The watchdog can be disabled in software by writing ‘1’ to bit 6 of the WDCR register (WDCR.6) while bit 5 of the SCSR2 register (SCSR2.5) is 1. If SCSR2.5 is 0, the watchdog will not be disabled. SCSR2.5 is equivalent to the WDDIS pin of the TMS320F243/241 devices. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 65 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 watchdog (WD) timer module (continued) CLKOUT ÷ 512 WDCLK System Reset 6-Bit FreeRunning Counter 3-bit Prescaler PLL CLKIN /64 /32 On-Chip Oscillator or External Clock /16 /8 /4 /2 CLR 000 001 010 011 WDPS WDCR.2 −0 2 1 0 100 101 110 WDCR.6 111 WDDIS WDFLAG WDCR.7 WDCNTR.7 −0 8-Bit Watchdog Counter One-Cycle Delay CLR Reset Flag Internal Pullup PS/257 RS Pin System Reset Request WDKEY.7 −0 Watchdog Reset Key Register Bad Key 55 + AA Detector Good Key WDCHK2−0 WDCR.5 −3† Bad WDCR Key 3 3 System Reset 1 0 1 (Constant Value) † Writing to bits WDCR.5 −3 with anything but the correct pattern (101) generates a system reset. Figure 19. Block Diagram of the WD Module 66 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 watchdog (WD) timer module (continued) Table 14. WD Overflow (Time-out) Selections WD PRESCALE SELECT BITS † ‡ WDCLK DIVIDER WATCHDOG CLOCK RATE† WDPS2 WDPS1 WDPS0 0 0 X‡ 1 FREQUENCY (Hz) WDCLK/1 0 1 0 2 WDCLK/2 0 1 1 4 WDCLK/4 1 0 0 8 WDCLK/8 1 0 1 16 WDCLK/16 1 1 0 32 WDCLK/32 1 1 1 64 WDCLK/64 WDCLK = CLKOUT/512 X = Don’t care development support Texas Instruments (TI) offers an extensive line of development tools for the x240xA generation of DSPs, including tools to evaluate the performance of the processors, generate code, develop algorithm implementations, and fully integrate and debug software and hardware modules. The following products support development of x240xA-based applications: Software Development Tools: Assembler/linker Simulator Optimizing ANSI C compiler Application algorithms C/Assembly debugger and code profiler Hardware Development Tools: Emulator XDS510 (supports x24x multiprocessor system debug) TMS320LF2407 EVM (Evaluation module for 2407 DSP) See Table 15 and Table 16 for complete listings of development support tools for the x240xA. For information on pricing and availability, contact the nearest TI field sales office or authorized distributor. Table 15. Development Support Tools DEVELOPMENT TOOL PLATFORM PART NUMBER Software Code Composer Studio v.2.2 PC TMDSCCS2000-1 Hardware − Emulation Debug Tools XDS510PP Pod (Parallel Port) with JTAG cable PC TMDS3P701014 PC is a trademark of International Business Machines Corp.. Code Composer Studio, XDS510, and XDS510PP are trademarks of Texas Instruments. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 67 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 development support (continued) Table 16. TMS320x24x-Specific Development Tools DEVELOPMENT TOOL PLATFORM PART NUMBER Hardware − Evaluation/Starter Kits 2401A eZdsp PC TMDSeZD2401 F2407A EVM PC TMDS3P701016A LF2407A eZdsp PC TMDSEZD2407 The LF2407 Evaluation Module (EVM) provide designers of motor and motion control applications with a complete and cost-effective way to take their designs from concept to production. These tools offer both a hardware and software development environment and include: D D D D D D D D D D D Flash-based LF240xA evaluation board Code Generation Tools Assembler/Linker C Compiler Source code debugger C24x Debugger Code Composer IDE XDS510PP JTAG-based emulator Sample applications code Universal 5-V DC power supply Documentation and cables device and development support tool nomenclature To designate the stages in the product development cycle, TI assigns prefixes to the part numbers of all TMS320 DSP devices and support tools. Each TMS320 DSP commercial family member has one of three prefixes: TMX, TMP, or TMS. Texas Instruments recommends two of three possible prefix designators for its support tools: TMDX and TMDS. These prefixes represent evolutionary stages of product development from engineering prototypes (TMX / TMDX) through fully qualified production devices/tools (TMS / TMDS). Device development evolutionary flow: TMX Experimental device that is not necessarily representative of the final device’s electrical specifications TMP Final silicon die that conforms to the device’s electrical specifications but has not completed quality and reliability verification TMS Fully qualified production device Support tool development evolutionary flow: TMDX Development-support product that has not yet completed Texas Instruments internal qualification testing. TMDS Fully qualified development-support product TMX and TMP devices and TMDX development-support tools are shipped against the following disclaimer: “Developmental product is intended for internal evaluation purposes.” TMS devices and TMDS development-support tools have been characterized fully, and the quality and reliability of the device have been demonstrated fully. TI’s standard warranty applies. TMS320 is a trademark of Texas Instruments. eZdsp is a trademark of Spectrum Digital, Inc. 68 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A,TMS320LF2406A,TMS320LF2403A,TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A,TMS320LC2404A,TMS320LC2403A,TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 device and development support tool nomenclature (continued) Predictions show that prototype devices (TMX or TMP) have a greater failure rate than the standard production devices. Texas Instruments recommends that these devices not be used in any production system because their expected end-use failure rate still is undefined. Only qualified production devices are to be used. TI device nomenclature also includes a suffix with the device family name. This suffix indicates the package type (for example, PAG, PG, PGE, and PZ) and temperature range (for example, A). Figure 20 provides a legend for reading the complete device name for any TMS320x240xA family member. See the timing section for specific options that are available on 240xA devices. TMS 320 LF 2407A PGE A PREFIX TMX = experimental device TMP = prototype device TMS = qualified device DEVICE FAMILY 320 = TMS320 DSP Family TECHNOLOGY LC = ROM (3.3 V) LF = Flash EEPROM (3.3 V) TEMPERATURE RANGE A S = −40°C to 85°C = −40°C to 125°C PACKAGE TYPE†‡ PG = 64-pin QFP PAG = 64-pin TQFP PGE = 144-pin plastic LQFP PZ = 100-pin plastic LQFP VF = 32-pin plastic LQFP DEVICE 240xA DSP 2407A§ 2406A§ 2404A 2403A 2402A 2401A † QFP = Quad Flatpack LQFP = Low-Profile Quad Flatpack TQFP = Thin Quad Flatpack ‡ Not yet available Lead (Pb)-free. For estimated conversion dates, go to www.ti.com/leadfree § The package dimensions of the 2407A and 2406A devices correspond to the LQFP package. These devices were stated to be in TQFP packaging in the TMX data sheets. The package dimensions have not changed; only the package designation has changed. Figure 20. TMS320x240xA Device Nomenclature POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 69 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 documentation support Extensive documentation supports all of the TMS320 DSP family generations of devices from product announcement through applications development. The types of documentation available include: data sheets, such as this document, with design specifications; complete user’s guides for all devices and development support tools; and hardware and software applications. Useful reference documentation includes: D D D User Guides − TMS320LF/LC240xA DSP Controllers Reference Guide: System and Peripherals (literature number SPRU357) − Manual Update Sheet for TMS320LF/LC240xA DSP Controllers Reference Guide: System and Peripherals (SPRU357) [literature number SPRZ015] − TMS320C240 DSP Controllers CPU, System, and Instruction Set Reference Guide (literature number SPRU160) Data Sheets − TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A, TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2402A DSP Controllers (literature number SPRS145) − TMS320LF2407, TMS320LF2406, TMS320LF2402 DSP Controllers (literature number SPRS094) − TMS320LF2401A DSP Controller (literature number SPRS161) Application Reports − 3.3-V DSP for Digital Motor Control (literature number SPRA550) To receive copies of TMS320 DSP literature, contact the Literature Response Center at 800-477-8924. A series of DSP textbooks is published by Prentice-Hall and John Wiley & Sons to support digital signal processing research and education. The TMS320 DSP newsletter, Details on Signal Processing, is published quarterly and distributed to update TMS320 DSP customers on product information. Updated information on the TMS320 DSP controllers can be found on the worldwide web at: http://www.ti.com. To send comments regarding this TMS320x240xA data sheet (literature number SPRS145), use the [email protected] email address, which is a repository for feedback. For questions and support, contact the Product Information Center listed at the http://www.ti.com/sc/docs/pic/home.htm site. 70 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 LF240xA AND LC240xA ELECTRICAL SPECIFICATIONS DATA absolute maximum ratings over operating free-air temperature ranges (unless otherwise noted)† Supply voltage range, VDD, PLLVCCA, VDDO, and VCCA (see Note 1) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 0.3 V to 4.6 V VCCP range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 0.3 V to 5.5 V Input voltage range, VIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 0.3 V to 4.6 V Output voltage range, VO LF240xA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 0.3 V to 4.6 V Output voltage range,VO LC240xA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 0.3 V to 4.6 V Input clamp current, IIK (VIN < 0 or VIN > VCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 20 mA Output clamp current, IOK (VO < 0 or VO > VCC) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ± 20 mA Operating free-air temperature ranges, TA: A version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 40°C to 85°C S version . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 40°C to 125°C Junction temperature range, TJ (see Note 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 40°C to 150°C Storage temperature range, Tstg (see Note 2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . − 65°C to 150°C † Clamp current stresses beyond those listed under “absolute maximum ratings” may cause permanent damage to the device. These are stress ratings only, and functional operation of the device at these or any other conditions beyond those indicated under “recommended operating conditions” is not implied. Exposure to absolute-maximum-rated conditions for extended periods may affect device reliability. NOTES: 1. All voltage values are with respect to VSS. 2. Long−term high−temperature storage and/or extended use at maximum temperature conditions may result in a reduction of overall device life. For additional information, see the IC Package Thermal Metrics Application Report (literature number SPRA953) and the Reliability Data for TMS320LF24x and TMS320F281x Devices Application Report (literature number SPRA963). recommended operating conditions‡§ VDDO = VDD ± 0.3 V MIN NOM MAX UNIT VDD/VDDO Supply voltage 3 3.3 3.6 V VSS Supply ground 0 0 0 V PLLVCCA PLL supply voltage 3 3.3 3.6 V 3 3.3 3.6 V 4.75 5 5.25 VCCA ¶ ADC supply voltage VCCP Flash programming supply voltage fCLKOUT Device clock frequency (system clock) VIH# High level input voltage High-level All inputs VIL Low level input voltage Low-level All inputs IOH High-level High level output source current, VOH = 2.4 V 40 2 3 VDD + 0 0.3 V 08 0.8 V Output pins Group 1|| −2 mA Output pins Group 2|| −4 mA Output pins Group 3|| −8 mA 1|| 2 mA Output pins Group 2|| 4 mA Output pins Group 3|| 8 mA Output pins Group IOL Low-level Low level output sink current, VOL = VOL MAX A version − 40 85 S version − 40 125 TA Free air temperature Free-air TJ Junction temperature Nf Flash endurance for the array (Write/erase cycles) V 2 − 40 − 40°C to 85°C 25 10K 150 MHz °C °C cycles ‡ See the mechanical data package page for thermal resistance values, ΘJA (junction-to-ambient), ΘJC (junction-to-case), and Ψjt (junction-to-top of case) § The drive strengths of the EVA PWM pins and the EVB PWM pins are not identical. ¶V CCA should not differ from VDD by more than 0.3 V. # The input buffers used in 240x/240xA are not 5-V compatible. || Primary signals and their groupings: Group 1: PWM1−PWM6, T1PWM, T2PWM, CAP1−CAP6, TCLKINA, IOPF6, IOPC1, TCK, TDI, TMS, XF, A0−A15, RS Group 2: PS/DS/IS, RD, W/R, STRB, R/W, VIS_OE, D0−D15, T3PWM, T4PWM, PWM7−PWM12, CANTX, CANRX, SPICLK, SPISOMI, SPISIMO, SPISTE, EMU0, EMU1, TDO, TMS2 Group 3: TDIRA, TDIRB, SCIRXD, SCITXD, XINT1, XINT2, CLKOUT, TCLKINB POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 71 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 electrical characteristics over recommended operating free-air temperature ranges (unless otherwise noted) PARAMETER TEST CONDITIONS VDD = 3.0 V, IOH = IOHMAX MIN TYP 2.4 MAX VDDO UNIT VOH High level output voltage High-level VOL Low-level output voltage IIL Input current (low level) IIH Input current (high level) IOZ Leakage current, high-impedance state (off-state) Ci Input capacitance 2 pF Co Output capacitance 3 pF All outputs at 50 µA VDDO − 0.2 IOL = IOLMAX With pullup VDD = 3 3.3 3V V, VIN = 0 V With pulldown With pullup 3V VDD = 3 3.3 V, VIN = VDD With pulldown 0.4 −10 −16 −30 ±2 ±2 10 16 30 ±2 VO = VDD or 0 V V V µA A A µA µA current consumption by power-supply pins over recommended operating free-air temperature ranges at 40-MHz CLOCKOUT PARAMETER IDD† Operational Current TEST CONDITIONS A test code running in B0 RAM does the following: 1. Enables clock to all peripherals. 2 Toggles all PWM outputs at 20 kHz 2. kHz. 3. Performs a continuous conversion of all ADC channels. 4 An infinite loop which transmits a character 4. out of SCI and executes MACD instructions. NOTE: All I/O pins are floating. floating ICCA † ADC module current IDD is the current flowing into the VDD, VDDO, and PLLVCCA pins. 72 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 DEVICE MIN TYP MAX UNIT LF2407A 95 120 mA LF2406A 95 120 mA LF2403A 95 120 mA LF2402A 85 110 mA LC2406A 85 110 mA LC2404A 85 110 mA LC2403A 75 95 mA LC2402A 75 95 mA LF2407A 10 22 mA LF2406A 10 22 mA LF2403A 10 22 mA LF2402A 10 22 mA LC2406A 10 22 mA LC2404A 10 22 mA LC2403A 10 22 mA LC2402A 10 22 mA TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 current consumption by power-supply pins over recommended operating free-air temperature ranges during low-power modes at 40-MHz CLOCKOUT (TMS320LF2407A) PARAMETER IDD† Operational Current ICCA ADC module current IDD † ‡ † Operational Current ICCA ADC module current IDD† Operational Current ICCA ADC module current MODE TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT Clock to all peripherals is enabled. No I/O pins are switching. 70 80 mA LPM0 10 22 mA Clock to all peripherals is disabled. No I/O pins are switching. 35 45 mA LPM1 0 0 mA LPM2 Clock to all peripherals is disabled. Flash is powered down. down Input clock is disabled.‡ 200 400 µA 0 0 mA IDD is the current flowing into the VDD, VDDO, and PLLVCCA pins. If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source, the LPM2 mode shuts down the internal oscillator. current consumption by power-supply pins over recommended operating free-air temperature ranges during low-power modes at 40-MHz CLOCKOUT (TMS320LF2406A) PARAMETER IDD † ‡ † Operational Current ICCA ADC module current IDD† Operational Current ICCA ADC module current IDD† Operational Current ICCA ADC module current MODE TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT Clock to all peripherals is enabled. No I/O pins are switching. 70 80 mA LPM0 10 22 mA Clock to all peripherals is disabled. No I/O pins are switching. 35 45 mA LPM1 0 0 mA LPM2 Clock to all peripherals is disabled. Flash is powered down. down Input clock is disabled.‡ 200 400 µA 0 0 mA IDD is the current flowing into the VDD, VDDO, and PLLVCCA pins. If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source, the LPM2 mode shuts down the internal oscillator. current consumption by power-supply pins over recommended operating free-air temperature ranges during low-power modes at 40-MHz CLOCKOUT (TMS320LF2403A) PARAMETER IDD † ICCA IDD † ICCA IDD † ICCA Operational Current ADC module current Operational Current ADC module current Operational Current ADC module current MODE TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT Clock to all peripherals is enabled. No I/O pins are switching. 70 80 mA LPM0 10 22 mA Clock to all peripherals is disabled. No I/O pins are switching. 35 45 mA LPM1 0 0 mA LPM2 Clock to all peripherals is disabled. Flash is powered down. down Input clock is disabled.‡ 200 400 µA 0 0 mA † IDD is the current flowing into the VDD, VDDO, and PLLVCCA pins. ‡ If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source, the LPM2 mode shuts down the internal oscillator. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 73 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 current consumption by power-supply pins over recommended operating free-air temperature ranges during low-power modes at 40-MHz CLOCKOUT (TMS320LF2402A) PARAMETER IDD† Operational Current ICCA ADC module current IDD † ‡ † Operational Current ICCA ADC module current IDD† Operational Current ICCA ADC module current MODE TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX UNIT Clock to all peripherals is enabled. No I/O pins are switching. 60 70 mA LPM0 10 22 mA Clock to all peripherals is disabled. No I/O pins are switching. 35 45 mA LPM1 0 0 mA LPM2 Clock to all peripherals is disabled. Flash is powered down. down Input clock is disabled.‡ 200 400 µA 0 0 mA IDD is the current flowing into the VDD, VDDO, and PLLVCCA pins. If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source, the LPM2 mode shuts down the internal oscillator. current consumption by power-supply pins over recommended operating free-air temperature ranges during low-power modes at 40-MHz CLOCKOUT (TMS320LC2406A) PARAMETER IDD † Operational Current ICCA ADC module current IDD† Operational Current ICCA ADC module current IDD† Operational Current MODE † ‡ MIN TYP MAX UNIT Clock to all peripherals is enabled. No I/O pins are switching. 50 70 mA LPM0 10 22 mA Clock to all peripherals is disabled. No I/O pins are switching. 35 45 mA LPM1 0 0 mA −40°C to 85°C 20 200 µA −40°C to 125°C 20 400 µA 0 0 mA LPM2 ICCA TEST CONDITIONS Clock to all peripherals is disabled. Input clock is disabled.‡ ADC module current IDD is the current flowing into the VDD, VDDO, and PLLVCCA pins. If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source, the LPM2 mode shuts down the internal oscillator. current consumption by power-supply pins over recommended operating free-air temperature ranges during low-power modes at 40-MHz CLOCKOUT (TMS320LC2404A) PARAMETER IDD † ICCA IDD † Operational Current ADC module current Operational Current ICCA ADC module current IDD† Operational Current MODE † ‡ MIN TYP MAX Clock to all peripherals is enabled. No I/O pins are switching. 50 70 mA 10 22 mA Clock to all peripherals is disabled. No I/O pins are switching. 35 45 mA LPM1 0 0 mA −40°C to 85°C 20 200 µA −40°C to 125°C 20 400 µA 0 0 mA Clock to all peripherals is disabled. Input clock is disabled.‡ ADC module current IDD is the current flowing into the VDD, VDDO, and PLLVCCA pins. If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source, the LPM2 mode shuts down the internal oscillator. 74 UNIT LPM0 LPM2 ICCA TEST CONDITIONS POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 current consumption by power-supply pins over recommended operating free-air temperature ranges during low-power modes at 40-MHz CLOCKOUT (TMS320LC2403A) PARAMETER IDD† Operational Current ICCA ADC module current IDD † Operational Current ICCA ADC module current IDD† Operational Current MODE † ‡ MIN TYP MAX UNIT Clock to all peripherals is enabled. No I/O pins are switching. 50 70 mA LPM0 10 22 mA Clock to all peripherals is disabled. No I/O pins are switching. 35 45 mA LPM1 0 0 mA −40°C to 85°C 20 200 µA −40°C to 125°C 20 400 µA 0 0 mA LPM2 ICCA TEST CONDITIONS Clock to all peripherals is disabled. Input clock is disabled.‡ ADC module current IDD is the current flowing into the VDD, VDDO, and PLLVCCA pins. If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source, the LPM2 mode shuts down the internal oscillator. current consumption by power-supply pins over recommended operating free-air temperature ranges during low-power modes at 40-MHz CLOCKOUT (TMS320LC2402A) PARAMETER IDD † ICCA Operational Current ADC module current IDD† Operational Current ICCA ADC module current IDD† Operational Current MODE LPM0 LPM1 LPM2 ICCA † ‡ ADC module current TEST CONDITIONS MIN TYP MAX Clock to all peripherals is enabled. No I/O pins are switching. 40 60 mA 10 22 mA Clock to all peripherals is disabled. No I/O pins are switching. 35 45 mA 0 0 mA −40°C to 85°C 20 200 µA −40°C to 125°C 20 400 µA 0 0 mA Clock to all peripherals is disabled. Input clock is disabled.‡ UNIT IDD is the current flowing into the VDD, VDDO, and PLLVCCA pins. If a quartz crystal or ceramic resonator is used as the clock source, the LPM2 mode shuts down the internal oscillator. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 75 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 current consumption graphs 100 90 80 Current (mA) I DD 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 CLKOUT Frequency (MHz) Figure 21. LF2407A Typical Current Consumption (With Peripheral Clocks Enabled) 100 90 80 Current (mA) I DD 70 60 50 40 30 20 10 0 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 CLKOUT Frequency (MHz) Figure 22. LC2406A Typical Current Consumption (With Peripheral Clocks Enabled) 76 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 reducing current consumption 240x DSPs incorporate a unique method to reduce the device current consumption. A reduction in current consumption can be achieved by turning off the clock to any peripheral module which is not used in a given application. Table 17 indicates the typical reduction in current consumption achieved by turning off the clocks to various peripherals. See the TMS320LF/LC240xA DSP Controllers Reference Guide: System and Peripherals (literature number SPRU357) for further information on how to turn off the clock to the peripherals. Table 17. Typical Current Consumption by Various Peripherals (at 40 MHz) † PERIPHERAL MODULE CURRENT REDUCTION (mA) CAN 8.4 EVA 6.1 EVB 6.1 ADC 3.7† SCI 1.9 SPI 1.3 This number represents the current drawn by the digital portion of the ADC module. Turning off the clock to the ADC module results in the elimination of the current drawn by the analog portion of the ADC (ICCA) as well. PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION IOL Tester Pin Electronics 50 Ω VLOAD Output Under Test CT IOH Where: IOL IOH VLOAD CT = = = = 2 mA (all outputs) 300 µA (all outputs) 1.5 V 50-pF typical load-circuit capacitance Figure 23. Test Load Circuit signal transition levels The data in this section is shown for the 3.3-V version. Note that some of the signals use different reference voltages, see the recommended operating conditions table. Output levels are driven to a minimum logic-high level of 2.4 V and to a maximum logic-low level of 0.4 V. Figure 24 shows output levels. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 77 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 2.4 V (VOH) 80% 20% 0.4 V (VOL) Figure 24. Output Levels Output transition times are specified as follows: D For a high-to-low transition, the level at which the output is said to be no longer high is below 80% of the total voltage range and lower and the level at which the output is said to be low is 20% of the total voltage range and lower. D For a low-to-high transition, the level at which the output is said to be no longer low is 20% of the total voltage range and higher and the level at which the output is said to be high is 80% of the total voltage range and higher. Figure 25 shows the input levels. 2.0 V (VIH) 90% 10% 0.8 V (VIL) Figure 25. Input Levels Input transition times are specified as follows: D For a high-to-low transition on an input signal, the level at which the input is said to be no longer high is 90% of the total voltage range and lower and the level at which the input is said to be low is 10% of the total voltage range and lower. D 78 For a low-to-high transition on an input signal, the level at which the input is said to be no longer low is 10% of the total voltage range and higher and the level at which the input is said to be high is 90% of the total voltage range and higher. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION timing parameter symbology Timing parameter symbols used are created in accordance with JEDEC Standard 100. To shorten the symbols, some of the pin names and other related terminology have been abbreviated as follows: A A[15:0] MS Memory strobe pins IS, DS, or PS Cl XTAL1/CLKIN R READY CO CLKOUT RD Read cycle or RD D D[15:0] RS RESET pin RS INT XINT1, XINT2 W Write cycle or WE Lowercase subscripts and their meanings: Letters and symbols and their meanings: a access time H High c cycle time (period) L Low d delay time V Valid f fall time X Unknown, changing, or don’t care level h hold time Z High impedance r rise time su setup time t transition time v valid time w pulse duration (width) general notes on timing All output signals from the 240xA devices (including CLKOUT) are derived from an internal clock such that all output transitions for a given half-cycle occur with a minimum of skewing relative to each other. The signal combinations shown in the following timing diagrams may not necessarily represent actual cycles. For actual cycle examples, see the appropriate cycle description section of this data sheet. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 79 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 external reference crystal/clock with PLL circuit enabled timing parameters with the PLL circuit enabled PARAMETER Input clock frequency† fx † MIN MAX Resonator 4 13 Crystal 4 20 CLKIN 4 20 UNIT MHz Input frequency should be adjusted (CLK PS bits in SCSR1 register) such that CLKOUT = 40 MHz maximum, 4 MHz minimum. switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions [H = 0.5 tc(CO)] (see Figure 26) PARAMETER † PLL MODE ×4 mode† MIN TYP MAX 25 UNIT tc(CO) Cycle time, CLKOUT tf(CO) Fall time, CLKOUT ns tr(CO) Rise time, CLKOUT tw(COL) Pulse duration, CLKOUT low H −3 H H +3 ns tw(COH) Pulse duration, CLKOUT high H −3 H H +3 ns tt Transition time, PLL synchronized after RS pin high 4096tc(Cl) ns 4 ns 4 ns Input frequency should be adjusted (CLK PS bits in SCSR1 register) such that CLKOUT = 40 MHz maximum, 4 MHz minimum. timing requirements (see Figure 26) MIN MAX UNIT 250 ns Fall time, XTAL1/CLKIN 5 ns Rise time, XTAL1/CLKIN 5 ns 40 60 % 40 60 % tc(Cl) Cycle time, XTAL1/CLKIN tf(Cl) tr(Cl) tw(CIL) Pulse duration, XTAL1/CLKIN low as a percentage of tc(Cl) tw(CIH) Pulse duration, XTAL1/CLKIN high as a percentage of tc(Cl) tc(CI) tw(CIH) tf(Cl) tr(Cl) tw(CIL) XTAL1/CLKIN tw(COH) tc(CO) tw(COL) tr(CO) CLKOUT Figure 26. CLKIN-to-CLKOUT Timing with PLL and External Clock in ×4 Mode 80 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 tf(CO) TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 RS timing timing requirements for a reset [H = 0.5tc(CO)] (see Figure 27 and Figure 28) MIN † tw(RSL) Pulse duration, stable CLKIN to RS high tw(RSL2) Pulse duration, RS low tp PLL lock-up time td(EX) Delay time, reset vector executed after PLL lock time NOM MAX UNIT 8tc(CI)† cycles 8tc(CI) cycles 4096tc(CI) 36H cycles ns During power-on reset, the device can continue to hold the RS pin low for another 128 CLKIN cycles. VDD/VDDO tp td(EX) tw(RSL) RS CLKIN XTAL1 (See Note B) tOSCST (See Note C) BOOT_EN/XF BOOT_EN XF CLKOUT I/Os Hi-Z (See Note D) Code-Dependent Address/ Data/ Control Address/Data/Control Valid NOTES: A. Be certain that the emulation logic is reset before de-asserting the device reset. That is, TRST of the device is not driven high before the device reset is de-asserted. This is applicable to XDS510, XDS510PP, and XDS510PP+ class of emulators. New generation emulators such as SPI515 and XDS510 USB emulators have built-in protection mechanism to take care of this requirement. B. XTAL1 refers to the internal oscillator clock if on-chip oscillator is used. C. tOSCST is the oscillator start-up time, which is dependent on crystal/resonator and board design. D. All I/Os contain a clamp to VDD. Inputs of approximately 0.7 V above VDD will cause the I/O to sink current. I/Os containing pullups or pulldowns will always sink/source a small amount of current once powered. Figure 27. Power-on Reset (See Note A) XDS510PP+, SP515, and XDS510 USB are trademarks of Spectrum Digital. XDS510 and XDS510PP, are trademarks of Texas Instruments. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 81 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 RS timing (continued) tp tw(RSL2) td(EX) RS CLKIN XTAL1† BOOT_EN /XF BOOT_EN XF CLKOUT I/Os Hi-Z Code-Dependent Address/ Data/ Control † Address/Data/Control Valid XTAL1 refers to internal oscillator clock if on-chip oscillator is used. Figure 28. Warm Reset 82 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 RS timing (continued) switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for a reset [H = 0.5tc(CO)] (see Figure 29) PARAMETER † MIN low† tw(RSL1) Pulse duration, RS td(EX) Delay time, reset vector executed after PLL lock time tp PLL lock time (input cycles) MAX UNIT 128tc(CI) ns 36H ns 4096tc(CI) ns The parameter tw(RSL1) refers to the time RS is an output. tp tw(RSL1) td(EX) RS CLKIN XTAL1† BOOT_EN /XF BOOT_EN XF CLKOUT I/Os Hi-Z Code-Dependent Address/ Data/ Control † Address/Data/Control Valid XTAL1 refers to internal oscillator clock if on-chip oscillator is used. Figure 29. Watchdog Initiated Reset POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 83 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 low-power mode timing switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions [H = 0.5tc(CO)] (see Figure 30, Figure 31, and Figure 32) PARAMETER LOW-POWER MODES MIN TYP MAX IDLE1 LPM0 12 × tc(CO) td(WAKE-A) Delay time, CLKOUT switching to program execution resume IDLE2 LPM1 15 × tc(CO) td(IDLE-COH) Delay time, Idle instruction executed to IDLE2 CLKOUT high LPM1 4tc(CO) ns td(WAKE-OSC) Delay time, wakeup interrupt asserted to oscillator running OSC start-up time ms 4tc(CO) ns td(IDLE-OSC) HALT Delay time, Idle instruction executed to {PLL/OSC power down} oscillator power off td(EX) Delay time, reset vector executed after PLL lock time LPM2 36H A0−A15 CLKOUT WAKE INT† WAKE INT can be any valid interrupt or RESET. Figure 30. IDLE1 Entry and Exit Timing − LPM0 td(IDLE−COH) A0−A15 CLKOUT WAKE INT† td(WAKE−A) † WAKE INT can be any valid interrupt or RESET. Figure 31. IDLE2 Entry and Exit Timing − LPM1 tp A0−A15 td(IDLE−OSC) td(IDLE−COH) CLKOUT td(WAKE−OSC) RESET Figure 32. HALT Mode − LPM2 84 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 ns ns td(WAKE−A) † UNIT tw(RSL) td(EX) TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 LPM2 wakeup timing switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 33) PARAMETER † td(PDP-PWM)HZ ( ) Delay time, PDPINTA low to PWM high-impedance state td(INT) Delay time, INT low/high to interrupt-vector fetch MIN MAX UNIT if bit 6 of SCSR2 = 0 (6 + 1)tc(CO) + 12† ns if bit 6 of SCSR2 = 1 12† ns (12+ 1)tc(CO) + 10tc(CO) + tw(PDP−WAKE) ns Includes i/p qualifier cycles plus synchronization plus propagation delay timing requirements (see Figure 33) MIN ‡ tw(PDP−WAKE)‡ Pulse duration duration, PDPINTA input low tp PLL lock-up time if bit 6 of SCSR2 = 0 6tc(CO) if bit 6 of SCSR2 = 1 12tc(CO) MAX UNIT ns 4096tc(CI) cycles This is different from 240x devices. XTAL1 Oscillator Disabled tOSC† tp CLKIN CLKOUT‡ tw(PDP−WAKE) PDPINTx td(PDP-PWM)HZ PWM td(INT) CPU Status CPU IDLE State (LPM2) Interrupt Vector§ or Next Instruction¶ † tOSC is the oscillator start-up time. CLKOUT frequency after LPM2 wakeup will be the same as that upon entering LPM2 (x4 shown as an example). § PDPINTx interrupt vector, if PDPINTx interrupt is enabled. ¶ If PDPINTx interrupt is disabled. ‡ Figure 33. LPM2 Wakeup Using PDPINTx POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 85 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 XF, BIO, and MP/MC timing switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 34) PARAMETER td(XF) Delay time, CLKOUT high to XF high/low MIN MAX −3 7 MIN MAX UNIT ns timing requirements (see Figure 34) tsu(BIO)CO Setup time, BIO or MP/MC low before CLKOUT low th(BIO)CO Hold time, BIO or MP/MC low after CLKOUT low ns 19 ns CLKOUT td(XF) XF tsu(BIO)CO BIO, MP/MC Figure 34. XF and BIO Timing 86 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 UNIT 0 th(BIO)CO TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 TIMING EVENT MANAGER INTERFACE PWM timing PWM refers to all PWM outputs on EVA and EVB. switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for PWM timing [H = 0.5tc(CO)] (see Figure 35) PARAMETER tw(PWM)† MAX 2H+5 Pulse duration, PWMx output high/low td(PWM)CO † MIN ns 15 Delay time, CLKOUT low to PWMx output switching UNIT ns PWM outputs may be 100%, 0%, or increments of tc(CO) with respect to the PWM period. timing requirements‡ [H = 0.5tc(CO)] (see Figure 36) MIN ‡ tw(TMRDIR) Pulse duration, TMRDIR low/high tw(TMRCLK) MAX 4H+5 UNIT ns Pulse duration, TMRCLK low as a percentage of TMRCLK cycle time 40 60 % twh(TMRCLK) Pulse duration, TMRCLK high as a percentage of TMRCLK cycle time 40 60 % tc(TMRCLK) Cycle time, TMRCLK 4 tc(CO) ns Parameter TMRDIR is equal to the pin TDIRx, and parameter TMRCLK is equal to the pin TCLKINx. CLKOUT td(PWM)CO tw(PWM) PWMx Figure 35. PWM Output Timing CLKOUT tw(TMRDIR) TMRDIR† † Parameter TMRDIR is equal to the pin TDIRx. Figure 36. TMRDIR Timing POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 87 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 capture and QEP timing CAP refers to all QEP and capture input pins. timing requirements (see Figure 37) MIN tw(CAP)† † Pulse duration duration, CAPx input low/high if bit 6 of SCSR2 = 0 6tc(CO) if bit 6 of SCSR2 = 1 12tc(CO) This is different from 240x devices. CLKOUT tw(CAP) CAPx Figure 37. Capture Input and QEP Timing 88 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 MAX UNIT ns TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 interrupt timing INT refers to XINT1 and XINT2. PDP refers to PDPINTx. switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 38) PARAMETER † td(PDP-PWM)HZ ( ) Delay time, PDPINTA low to PWM high-impedance state td(INT) Delay time, INT low/high to interrupt-vector fetch MIN MAX UNIT if bit 6 of SCSR2 = 0 (6 + 1)tc(CO) + 12† ns if bit 6 of SCSR2 = 1 (12+ 1)tc(CO) + 12† ns 10tc(CO) + tW (INT) ns Includes i/p qualifier cycles plus synchronization plus propagation delay timing requirements (see Figure 38) MIN † tw(INT)† Pulse duration duration, INT input low/high tw(PDP)† Pulse duration, duration PDPINTx input low if bit 6 of SCSR2 = 0 6tc(CO) if bit 6 of SCSR2 = 1 12tc(CO) if bit 6 of SCSR2 = 0 6tc(CO) if bit 6 of SCSR2 = 1 12tc(CO) MAX UNIT ns ns This is different from 240x devices. CLKOUT tw(PDP) PDPINTx td(PDP-PWM)HZ PWM† tw(INT) XINT1, XINT2 td(INT) Interrupt Vector A0−A15 † PWM refers to all the PWM pins in the device (i.e., PWMn and TnPWM pins). The state of the PWM pins after PDPINTx is taken high depends on the state of the FCOMPOE bit. Figure 38. External Interrupts Timing POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 89 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 general-purpose input/output timing switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions (see Figure 39) PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT td(GPO)CO Dela time Delay time, CLKOUT lo low to GPIO low/high lo /high All GPIOs 9 ns tr(GPO) Rise time, GPIO switching low to high All GPIOs 8 ns tf(GPO) Fall time, GPIO switching high to low All GPIOs 6 ns timing requirements [H = 0.5tc(CO)] (see Figure 40) MIN tw(GPI) 2H+15 Pulse duration, GPI high/low CLKOUT td(GPO)CO GPIO tr(GPO) tf(GPO) Figure 39. General-Purpose Output Timing CLKOUT tw(GPI) GPIO Figure 40. General-Purpose Input Timing 90 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 MAX UNIT ns SPI MASTER MODE TIMING PARAMETERS SPI master mode timing information is listed in the following tables. SPI master mode external timing parameters (clock phase = 0)†‡ (see Figure 41) SPI WHEN (SPIBRR + 1) IS EVEN OR SPIBRR = 0 OR 2 NO. 1 MAX MIN MAX 4tc(CO) 128tc(CO) 5tc(CO) 127tc(CO) Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M 0.5tc(SPC)M −0.5tc(CO) −10 0.5tc(SPC)M −0.5tc(CO) tw(SPCL)M Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M 0.5tc(SPC)M −0.5tc(CO) −10 0.5tc(SPC)M −0.5tc(CO) tw(SPCL)M Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M 0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc (CO)−10 0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(CO) tw(SPCH)M Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M 0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc (CO)−10 0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(CO) td(SPCH-SIMO)M Delay time, SPICLK high to SPISIMO valid (clock polarity = 0) − 10 10 − 10 10 td(SPCL-SIMO)M Delay time, SPICLK low to SPISIMO valid (clock polarity = 1) − 10 10 − 10 10 tv(SPCL-SIMO)M Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK low (clock polarity =0) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(CO) −10 tv(SPCH-SIMO)M Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK high (clock polarity =1) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(CO) −10 tsu(SOMI-SPCL)M Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0) 0 0 tsu(SOMI-SPCH)M Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1) 0 0 tv(SPCL-SOMI)M Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0) 0.25tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M −0.5tc(CO) −10 tv(SPCH-SOMI)M Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1) 0.25tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M −0.5tc (CO)−10 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 4§ 5§ 8§ 9§ ns ns ns ns ns ns The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is set and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is cleared. tc = system clock cycle time = 1/CLKOUT = tc(CO) § The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6). 91 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS tw(SPCH)M ns SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 Cycle time, SPICLK 3§ ‡ UNIT MIN tc(SPC)M 2§ † SPI WHEN (SPIBRR + 1) IS ODD AND SPIBRR > 3 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION 1 SPICLK (clock polarity = 0) 2 3 SPICLK (clock polarity = 1) 4 5 SPISIMO Master Out Data Is Valid 8 9 SPISOMI Master In Data Must Be Valid SPISTE† † The SPISTE signal is active before the SPI communication stream starts; the SPISTE signal remains active until the SPI communication stream is complete. Figure 41. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0) 92 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 SPI master mode external timing parameters (clock phase = 1)†‡ (see Figure 42) SPI WHEN (SPIBRR + 1) IS EVEN OR SPIBRR = 0 OR 2 NO. 1 MAX MIN MAX 4tc(CO) 128tc(CO) 5tc(CO) 127tc(CO) Cycle time, SPICLK tw(SPCH)M Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M 0.5tc(SPC)M −0.5tc (CO)−10 0.5tc(SPC)M − 0.5tc(CO) tw(SPCL)M Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M 0.5tc(SPC)M −0.5tc (CO)−10 0.5tc(SPC)M −0.5tc(CO) tw(SPCL)M Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M 0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(CO) −10 0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(CO) tw(SPCH)M Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M 0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(CO) −10 0.5tc(SPC)M + 0.5tc(CO) tsu(SIMO-SPCH)M Setup time, SPISIMO data valid before SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 tsu(SIMO-SPCL)M Setup time, SPISIMO data valid before SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 tv(SPCH-SIMO)M Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK high (clock polarity =0) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 tv(SPCL-SIMO)M Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK low (clock polarity =1) 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 tsu(SOMI-SPCH)M Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0) 0 0 tsu(SOMI-SPCL)M Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1) 0 0 tv(SPCH-SOMI)M Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0) 0.25tc(SPC)M −10 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 tv(SPCL-SOMI)M Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1) 0.25tc(SPC)M −10 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 6§ 7§ 11§ ns ns 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 ns ns ns ns The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is set and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is set. tc = system clock cycle time = 1/CLKOUT = tc(CO) § The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6). 0.5tc(SPC)M −10 93 SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 10§ ns TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS 3§ ‡ UNIT MIN tc(SPC)M 2§ † SPI WHEN (SPIBRR + 1) IS ODD AND SPIBRR > 3 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 PARAMETER MEASUREMENT INFORMATION 1 SPICLK (clock polarity = 0) 2 3 SPICLK (clock polarity = 1) 6 7 SPISIMO Data Valid Master Out Data Is Valid 10 11 Master In Data Must Be Valid SPISOMI SPISTE† † The SPISTE signal is active before the SPI communication stream starts; the SPISTE signal remains active until the SPI communication stream is complete. Figure 42. SPI Master Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1) 94 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 SPI slave mode timing parameters Slave mode timing information is listed in the following tables. SPI slave mode external timing parameters (clock phase = 0)†‡ (see Figure 43) NO. 12 13§ 14§ 15§ MIN tc(SPC)S Cycle time, SPICLK tw(SPCH)S Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0) 0.5tc(SPC)S −10 0.5tc(SPC)S tw(SPCL)S Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1) 0.5tc(SPC)S −10 0.5tc(SPC)S tw(SPCL)S Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0) 0.5tc(SPC)S −10 0.5tc(SPC)S tw(SPCH)S Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1) 0.5tc(SPC)S −10 0.5tc(SPC)S td(SPCH-SOMI)S Delay time, SPICLK high to SPISOMI valid (clock polarity = 0) 0.375tc(SPC)S −10 td(SPCL-SOMI)S Delay time, SPICLK low to SPISOMI valid (clock polarity = 1) 0.375tc(SPC)S −10 tv(SPCL-SOMI)S Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK low (clock polarity =0) 0.75tc(SPC)S tv(SPCH-SOMI)S Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK high (clock polarity =1) 0.75tc(SPC)S tsu(SIMO-SPCL)S Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0) 0 tsu(SIMO-SPCH)S Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1) 0 tv(SPCL-SIMO)S Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0) 0.5tc(SPC)S tv(SPCH-SIMO)S Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1) 0.5tc(SPC)S 16§ 19§ MAX 4tc(CO)‡ 20§ UNIT ns ns ns ns ns ns ns † The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is cleared and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is cleared. tc = system clock cycle time = 1/CLKOUT = tc(CO) § The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6). ‡ POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 95 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 SPI slave mode external timing parameters (continued) 12 SPICLK (clock polarity = 0) 13 14 SPICLK (clock polarity = 1) 15 16 SPISOMI SPISOMI Data Is Valid 19 20 SPISIMO SPISIMO Data Must Be Valid SPISTE† † The SPISTE signal must be active before the SPI communication stream starts; the SPISTE signal must remain active until the SPI communication stream is complete. Figure 43. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 0) 96 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 SPI slave mode timing parameters (continued) SPI slave mode external timing parameters (clock phase = 1)†‡ (see Figure 44) NO. 12 13§ 14§ 17§ MIN Cycle time, SPICLK tw(SPCH)S Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0) 0.5tc(SPC)S −10 0.5tc(SPC)S tw(SPCL)S Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1) 0.5tc(SPC)S −10 0.5tc(SPC)S tw(SPCL)S Pulse duration, SPICLK low (clock polarity = 0) 0.5tc(SPC)S −10 0.5tc(SPC)S tw(SPCH)S Pulse duration, SPICLK high (clock polarity = 1) 0.5tc(SPC)S −10 0.5tc(SPC)S tsu(SOMI-SPCH)S Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0) 0.125tc(SPC)S tsu(SOMI-SPCL)S Setup time, SPISOMI before SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1) 0.125tc(SPC)S tv(SPCH-SOMI)S Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK high (clock polarity =0) 0.75tc(SPC)S tv(SPCL-SOMI)S Valid time, SPISOMI data valid after SPICLK low (clock polarity =1) 0.75tc(SPC)S tsu(SIMO-SPCH)S Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0) 0 tsu(SIMO-SPCL)S Setup time, SPISIMO before SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1) 0 tv(SPCH-SIMO)S Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK high (clock polarity = 0) 0.5tc(SPC)S tv(SPCL-SIMO)S Valid time, SPISIMO data valid after SPICLK low (clock polarity = 1) 0.5tc(SPC)S 18§ 21§ MAX tc(SPC)S 22§ 8tc(CO) UNIT ns ns ns ns ns ns ns † The MASTER / SLAVE bit (SPICTL.2) is cleared and the CLOCK PHASE bit (SPICTL.3) is set. tc = system clock cycle time = 1/CLKOUT = tc(CO) § The active edge of the SPICLK signal referenced is controlled by the CLOCK POLARITY bit (SPICCR.6). ‡ POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 97 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 SPI slave mode timing parameters (continued) 12 SPICLK (clock polarity = 0) 13 14 SPICLK (clock polarity = 1) 17 18 SPISOMI SPISOMI Data Is Valid Data Valid 21 22 SPISIMO SPISIMO Data Must Be Valid SPISTE† † The SPISTE signal must be active before the SPI communication stream starts; the SPISTE signal must remain active until the SPI communication stream is complete. Figure 44. SPI Slave Mode External Timing (Clock Phase = 1) 98 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 external memory interface read timing switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for an external memory interface read at 40 MHz [H = 0.5tc(CO)] (see Figure 45) PARAMETER MIN MAX UNIT td(COL-CNTL) Delay time, CLKOUT low to control valid 4 ns td(COL-CNTH) Delay time, CLKOUT low to control inactive 5 ns td(COL-A)RD Delay time, CLKOUT low to address valid 8 ns td(COH-RDL) Delay time, CLKOUT high to RD strobe active 5 ns td(COL-RDH) Delay time, CLKOUT low to RD strobe inactive high 1 ns td(COL-SL) Delay time, CLKOUT low to STRB strobe active low 5 ns td(COL-SH) Delay time, CLKOUT low to STRB strobe inactive high 6 ns td(WRN) Delay time, W/R going low to R/W rising 5 ns th(A)COL Hold time, address valid after CLKOUT low tsu(A)RD th(A)RD −8 2 ns Setup time, address valid before RD strobe active low H−7 ns Hold time, address valid after RD strobe inactive high 0 ns timing requirements [H = 0.5tc(CO)] (see Figure 45) MIN ta(A) Access time, read data from address valid ta(RD) Access time, read data from RD low tsu(D)RD MAX UNIT 2H −10 ns H−7 ns Setup time, read data before RD strobe inactive high 8 ns th(D)RD Hold time, read data after RD strobe inactive high 0 ns th(AIV-D) Hold time, read data after address invalid 0 ns POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 99 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 external memory interface read timing (continued) CLKOUT td(COL−CNTL) td(COL−CNTH) PS, DS, IS td(COL−A)RD td(COL−A)RD th(A)COL th(A)COL A[0:15] td(COH−RDL) td(COL−RDH) ta(A) td(COH−RDL) td(COL−RDH) th(A)RD RD tsu(A)RD th(AIV−D) ta(A) tsu(D)RD td(WRN) ta(RD) th(D)RD tsu(D)RD th(D)RD W/R R/W D[0:15] td(COL−SL) td(COL−SH) STRB Figure 45. Memory Interface Read/Read Timings 100 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 external memory interface write timing switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for an external memory interface write at 40 MHz [H = 0.5tc(CO)] (see Figure 46) PARAMETER td(COH-CNTL) Delay time, CLKOUT high to control valid td(COH-CNTH) Delay time, CLKOUT high to control inactive MIN MAX UNIT 4 ns 5 ns 10 ns Delay time, CLKOUT high to R/W low 6 ns td(COH-RWH) Delay time, CLKOUT high to R/W high 6 ns td(COL-WL) Delay time, CLKOUT low to WE strobe active low 6 ns td(COL-WH) Delay time, CLKOUT low to WE strobe inactive high 6 ns ten(D)COL Enable time, data bus driven from CLKOUT low td(COL-SL) Delay time, CLKOUT low to STRB active low 6 ns td(COL-SH) td(COH-A)W Delay time, CLKOUT high to address valid td(COH-RWL) −3 ns Delay time, CLKOUT low to STRB inactive high 6 ns td(WRN) Delay time, W/R going low to R/W rising 5 ns th(A)COLW Hold time, address valid after CLKOUT low tsu(A)W Setup time, address valid before WE strobe active low tsu(D)W Setup time, write data before WE strobe inactive high th(D)W Hold time, write data after WE strobe inactive high tdis(W-D) Disable time, data bus high impedance from WE high POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 −5 ns H−9 ns 2H−17 ns 2 ns 5 ns 101 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 external memory interface write timing (continued) CLKOUT td(COH−CNTL) td(COH−CNTH) td(COH−CNTL) PS, DS, IS td(COH−A)W th(A)COLW A[0:15] td(COH−RWL) td(COH−RWH) tsu(A)W R/W td(WRN) W/R td(COL−WH) td(COL−WL) td(COL−WH) td(COL−WL) WE tdis(W-D) ten(D)COL ten(D)COL tsu(D)W th(D)W tsu(D)W th(D)W D[0:15] td(COL−SL) td(COL−SL) td(COL−SH) td(COL−SH) STRB ENA_144 CLKOUT 2H 2H VIS_OE NOTE A: VIS_OE will be visible at pin 97 of LF2407A when ENA_144 is high along with BVIS bits (10,9 of WSGR register − FFFFh@I/O) set to 10 or 11. CLKOUT and VIS_OE indicate internal memory write cycles (program/data). During VIS_OE cycles, the external bus will be driven. CLKOUT is to be used along with VIS_OE for trace capabilities. Figure 46. Memory Interface Write/Write Timings 102 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 external memory interface ready-on-read timing switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for an external memory interface ready-on-read (see Figure 47) PARAMETER td(COL-A)RD MIN MAX 8 Delay time, CLKOUT low to address valid UNIT ns timing requirements for an external memory interface ready-on-read (see Figure 47) MIN th(RDY)COH Hold time, READY after CLKOUT high tsu(D)RD Setup time, read data before RD strobe inactive high tv(RDY)ARD Valid time, READY after address valid on read tsu(RDY)COH Setup time, READY before CLKOUT high MAX −3 UNIT ns 8 ns −2 22 ns ns CLKOUT Wait Cycle PS, DS, IS td(COL−A)RD A[0:15] RD tsu(D)RD D[0:15] STRB tv(RDY)ARD th(RDY)COH READY† tsu(RDY)COH † The WSGR register must be programmed before the READY pin can be used. See the READY pin description for more details. Figure 47. Ready-on-Read Timings POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 103 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 external memory interface ready-on-read timing (continued) timing requirements for an external memory interface ready-on-read with one software wait state and one external wait state (see Figure 48) MIN MAX UNIT th(RDY)COH Hold time, READY after CLKOUT high H − 2.5 ns tsu(RDY)COH Setup time, READY before CLKOUT high H − 9.5 ns td(COL-A)RD Delay time, CLKOUT low to address valid SW = 1 cycle 8 EXW = 1 cycle Read Cycle CLKOUT PS, DS, IS td(COL-A)RD A[0:15] W/R R/W D[0:15] STRB th(RDY)COH tsu(RDY)COH READY RD Figure 48. Ready-on-Read Timings With One Software Wait (SW) State and One External Wait (EXW) State 104 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 ns TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 external memory interface ready-on-write timing switching characteristics over recommended operating conditions for an external memory interface ready-on-write (see Figure 49) PARAMETER td(COH-A)W MIN MAX 10 Delay time, CLKOUT high to address valid UNIT ns timing requirements for an external memory interface ready-on-write [H = 0.5tc(CO)] (see Figure 49) MIN th(RDY)COH Hold time, READY after CLKOUT high tsu(D)W Setup time, write data before WE strobe inactive high tv(RDY)AW Valid time, READY after address valid on write tsu(RDY)COH Setup time, READY before CLKOUT high MAX UNIT −3 ns 2H−17 ns −3 22 ns ns CLKOUT Wait Cycle PS, DS, IS td(COH−A)W A[0:15] WE tsu(D)W D[0:15] STRB tv(RDY)AW tsu(RDY)COH th(RDY)COH READY Figure 49. Ready-on-Write Timings POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 105 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 external memory interface ready-on-write timing (continued) timing requirements for an external memory interface ready-on-write with one software wait state and one external wait state (see Figure 50) MIN MAX UNIT th(RDY)COH Hold time, READY after CLKOUT high H − 2.5 ns tsu(RDY)COH Setup time, READY before CLKOUT high H − 9.5 ns td(COH-A)W Delay time, CLKOUT high to address valid SW = 1 cycle 10 EXW = 1 cycle Write Cycle CLKOUT PS, DS, IS td(COH−A)W A[0:15] tsu(RDY)COH th(RDY)COH READY R/W WE D[0:15] STRB Figure 50. Ready-on-Write Timings With One Software Wait (SW) State and One External Wait (EXW) State 106 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 ns TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 10-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC) The 10-bit ADC has a separate power bus for its analog circuitry. These pins are referred to as VCCA and VSSA. The power bus isolation is to enhance ADC performance by preventing digital switching noise of the logic circuitry that can be present on VSS and VCC from coupling into the ADC analog stage. All ADC specifications are given with respect to VSSA unless otherwise noted. Resolution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-bit (1024 values) Monotonic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assured Output conversion mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 000h to 3FFh (000h for VI ≤ VREFLO; 3FFh for VI ≥ VREFHI) Minimum conversion time (including sample time) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 500 ns recommended operating conditions MIN † ‡ VCCA Analog supply voltage VSSA Analog ground 3.0 VREFHI Analog supply reference source† VREFLO Analog ground reference source† VAI Analog input voltage, ADCIN00−ADCIN07 NOM MAX 3.3 3.6 0 UNIT V V ‡ VCCA VSSA V V VREFLO VREFHI V VREFHI and VREFLO must be stable, within ±1/2 LSB of the required resolution, during the entire conversion time. VREFHI can be from 2.0 V to VCCA; however, the accuracy of the ADC depends on the ground bounce and noise on the target board. ADC operating frequency MIN ADC operating frequency 4 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 MAX UNIT 30 MHz 107 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 10-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC) (continued) operating characteristics over recommended operating condition ranges† PARAMETER DESCRIPTION MIN VCCA = 3.3 V ICCA Analog supply current IADREFHI VREFHI input current IADCIN Analog input leakage VCCA = VREFHI = 3.3 V MAX 10 15 mA 1 µA 1.5 mA 1 µA PLL or OSC power down 0.75 Non-sampling 10 Sampling 30 Cai Analog input capacitance Typical capacitive load on analog input pin td(PU) Delay time, power-up to ADC valid Time to stabilize analog stage after power-up ZAI Analog input source impedance Analog input source impedance needed for conversions to remain within specifications at min tw(SH) 53 UNIT pF 10 µs 10 Ω "2 Zero-offset error † TYP LSB Absolute resolution = 3.22 mV. At VREFHI = 3.3 V and VREFLO = 0 V, this is one LSB. As VREFHI decreases, VREFLO increases, or both, the LSB size decreases. Therefore, the absolute accuracy and differential/integral linearity errors in terms of LSBs increase. EDNL and EINL PARAMETER ‡ DESCRIPTION CLKOUT MIN MAX UNIT EDNL‡ Differential nonlinearity error Difference between the actual step width and the ideal value 30 MHz "2 LSB EINL‡ Integral nonlinearity error Maximum deviation from the best straight line through the ADC transfer characteristics, excluding the quantization error 30 MHz "2 LSB Test conditions: VREFHI = VCCA , VREFLO = VSSA 108 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 10-bit analog-to-digital converter (ADC) (continued) internal ADC module timing† (see Figure 51) MIN MAX UNIT tc(AD) C l time, Cycle ti ADC prescaled l d clock l k 33 33.3 3 ns tw(SHC) Pulse duration duration, total sample/hold and conversion i time ti ‡ 500 ns td(SOC-SH) Delay time, start of conversion to beginning of sample and hold 2tc(CO) ns tw(SH) Pulse duration, sample and hold time 2tc(AD)§ tw(C) Pulse duration, total conversion time 10tc(AD) ns td(EOC) Delay time, end of conversion to data loaded into result register 2tc(CO) ns td(ADCINT) Delay time, ADC flag to ADC interrupt 2tc(CO) ns 32tc(AD) ns † The ADC timing diagram represents a typical conversion sequence. See the ADC chapter in the TMS320LF/LC240xA DSP Controllers Reference Guide: System and Peripherals (literature number SPRU357) for more details. ‡ The total sample/hold and conversion time is determined by the summation of t d(SOC-SH), tw(SH), tw(C), and td(EOC) . § Can be varied by ACQ Prescaler bits in the ADCTRL1 register tc(AD) Bit Converted 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 0 ADC Clock Analog Input Á Á Á Á tw(C) EOC/Convert tw(SH) Internal Start/ Sample Hold td(SOC−SH) Start of Convert td(EOC) tw(SHC) XFR to RESULTn td(ADCINT) ADC Interrupt Figure 51. Analog-to-Digital Internal Module Timing POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 109 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 Flash parameters @40 MHz CLOCKOUT† PARAMETER MIN TYP Erase time‡ ICCP (VCCP pin current) † ‡ UNIT 30 µs Time/4K Sector 130 ms Time/12K Sector 400 ms Time/4K Sector 350 ms Time/Word (16-bit) Clear/Programming time‡ MAX Time/12K Sector 1 Indicates the typical/maximum current consumption during the Clear-Erase-Program (C-E-P) cycle 5 s 15 mA TI releases upgrades to the Flash algorithms for these devices; hence, these typical values are subject to change. The indicated time does not include the time it takes to load the C-E-P algorithm and the code (to be programmed) onto on-chip RAM. The values specified are when VDD = 3.3 V and VCCP = 5 V, and any deviation from these values could affect the timing parameters. Aging and process variance could also impact the timing parameters. migrating from LF240xA (Flash) devices to LC240xA (ROM) devices When migrating from a Flash to a ROM device, be sure to review this section for a list of important differences that should be considered. Customer applications should consider these differences in their design, prior to ROM code submission. Due to the fact that the flash and ROM are different silicon, the following parameters may be similar but not exactly identical. Refer to the respective datasheet sections for more detail: D D D D EMI/ESD behavior ADC performance Current consumption Device ID register values Table 18 outlines the differences between the LF240xA (Flash) devices and the LC240xA (ROM) devices. Table 18. Differences Between LF240xA (Flash) Devices and LC240xA (ROM) Devices LF2406A LC2406A LC2404A LF2403A LC2403A LF2402A LC2402A On-chip Flash or ROM FEATURE 32K 32K 16K 16K 16K 8K 6K Single-Access RAM (SARAM) (16-bit words) 2K 2K 1K 512 512 512 — Boot ROM Event Managers Yes — — Yes Yes Yes — EVA, EVB EVA, EVB EVA, EVB EVA EVA EVA EVA ADC Channels 16 16 16 8 8 8 8 SPI Yes Yes Yes Yes§ Yes§ — — CAN Yes Yes — Yes Yes — — GPIO Pins 41 41 41 21 21 21 21 BIO Pin Yes Yes Yes — — — — TDIRx Pin Yes Yes Yes — — — — External Interrupts Access to External Memory Spaces¶ VCCP Pin Functionality Packaging 5 5 5 3 3 3 3 See Note 1 See Note 2 See Note 2 See Note 1 See Note 1 See Note 1 See Note 2 VCCP No Connect No Connect VCCP No Connect VCCP No Connect 100-pin PZ 100-pin PZ 100-pin PZ 64-pin PAG 64-pin PAG 64-pin PG 64-pin PG, PAG § The SPISTE pin is not available on the LF2403A. See the SPI Slave Mode Operation in LF2403A section. Application code should NOT access Illegal/Reserved addresses. NOTES: 1. Access to external Program, Data, and I/O space is considered illegal and would assert an NMI. 2. The external Program and I/O spaces are implemented as “reserved” addresses and any access will not assert an NMI. However, the external data memory space is illegal. ¶ 110 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 migrating from 240x devices to 240xA devices This section highlights the new features/migration issues of the 240xA devices (as compared to the 240x family) and describes the impact these features/issues have on user applications. maximum clock speed 240xA devices can operate at a maximum speed of 40 MHz compared to the 30-MHz operation of 240x devices. This change in clock speed warrants a change in the register contents of all the peripherals. For example, to maintain the same baud rate, the divisor values that are loaded to the SPI, SCI, and CAN registers must be recalculated. code security module 240xA devices incorporate a “code security module” which protects the contents of program memory from unauthorized duplication. Passwords stored in password locations (PWL) 0040h to 0043h are used for this purpose. Even if the code is not secured with passwords (i.e., PWL contains FFFFFFFFFFFFFFFFh), the PWL must still be read to gain access to the program memory contents. Note that locations 0040h to 0043h were available for user code in the 240x devices, which lack the “code security module”. In 240xA devices, these locations are reserved for the passwords and are not available for the user code. Even if code security feature is not used, these locations must be written with all ones. This fact must be borne in mind while submitting ROM codes to TI. input-qualifier circuitry An input-qualifier circuitry qualifies the input signal to the CAP1–6 (QEP1−4), XINT1/2, ADCSOC, and PDPINTA/B pins in the x240xA devices. The state of the internal input signal will change only after these pins are high/low for 6 (12) clock edges. The user must hold the pin high/low for 6 (12) cycles to ensure that the device see the level change. The increase in the pulse width of the signals used to excite these pins must be taken into account while migrating from the 240x to the 240xA family. Bit 6 of the SCSR2 register controls whether 6 clock edges (bit 6 = 0) or 12 clock edges (bit 6 = 1) are used to block 5- or 11-cycle glitches. This bit is a “reserved” bit in 240x devices. status of the PDPINTx pin The current status of the PDPINTx pins is now reflected in bit 8 of the COMCONx registers. This bit is a “reserved” bit in 240x devices. operation of the IOPC0 pin At reset, all LF240xA devices come up with the W/R/IOPC0 pin in W/R mode. On devices that lack an external memory interface (e.g., LF2406A), W/R mode is not functional and MCRB.0 must be set to a 0 if the IOPC0 pin is to be used. The XMIF Hi-Z control bit (bit 4 of the SCSR2 register) is reserved in these devices and must be written with a zero. external pulldown resistor for TRST pin An external pulldown resistor may be needed for the TRST pin in boards that operate in noisy environments. Refer to the TRST pin description for more details. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 111 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 migrating from LF240x devices to LC240xA devices When migrating from an “unsecured” Flash device (LF240x) to a “secured” ROM device (LC240xA), two migration paths have to be taken into consideration: D Migrating from a 240x device to a 240xA device (see the Migrating From 240x Devices to 240xA Devices section) D Migrating from a Flash (LF) device to a ROM (LC) device (see the Migrating From LF240xA (Flash) Devices to LC240xA (ROM) Devices section) 112 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register description Table 19 is a collection of all the programmable registers of the LF240xA/LC240xA and is provided as a quick reference. Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 REG DATA MEMORY SPACE CPU STATUS REGISTERS ARP DP(7) DP(6) DP(5) ARB 1 OV OVM 1 INTM DP(8) DP(4) DP(3) DP(2) DP(1) DP(0) CNF TC SXM C XF 1 1 1 1 1 PM — — — — — — — — — — INT6 MASK INT5 MASK INT4 MASK INT3 MASK INT2 MASK INT1 MASK — — — — — — — — — — INT6 FLAG INT5 FLAG INT4 FLAG INT3 FLAG INT2 FLAG INT1 FLAG IRQ0.15 IRQ0.14 IRQ0.13 IRQ0.12 IRQ0.11 IRQ0.10 IRQ0.9 IRQ0.8 IRQ0.7 IRQ0.6 IRQ0.5 IRQ0.4 IRQ0.3 IRQ0.2 IRQ0.1 IRQ0.0 IRQ1.15 IRQ1.14 IRQ1.13 IRQ1.12 IRQ1.11 IRQ1.10 IRQ1.9 IRQ1.8 IRQ1.7 IRQ1.6 IRQ1.5 IRQ1.4 IRQ1.3 IRQ1.2 IRQ1.1 IRQ1.0 IRQ2.15 IRQ2.14 IRQ2.13 IRQ2.12 IRQ2.11 IRQ2.10 IRQ2.9 IRQ2.8 IRQ2.7 IRQ2.6 IRQ2.5 IRQ2.4 IRQ2.3 IRQ2.2 IRQ2.1 IRQ2.0 IAK0.15 IAK0.14 IAK0.13 IAK0.12 IAK0.11 IAK0.10 IAK0.9 IAK0.8 IAK0.7 IAK0.6 IAK0.5 IAK0.4 IAK0.3 IAK0.2 IAK0.1 IAK0.0 IAK1.15 IAK1.14 IAK1.13 IAK1.12 IAK1.11 IAK1.10 IAK1.9 IAK1.8 IAK1.7 IAK1.6 IAK1.5 IAK1.4 IAK1.3 IAK1.2 IAK1.1 IAK1.0 IAK2.15 IAK2.14 IAK2.13 IAK2.12 IAK2.11 IAK2.10 IAK2.9 IAK2.8 IAK2.7 IAK2.6 IAK2.5 IAK2.4 IAK2.3 IAK2.2 IAK2.1 IAK2.0 — CLKSRC LPM1 LPM0 CLK PS2 CLK PS1 CLK PS0 — ADC CLKEN SCI CLKEN SPI CLKEN CAN CLKEN EVB CLKEN EVA CLKEN — ILLADR — — — — — — — — — I/P QUALIFIER CLOCKS WD OVERRIDE XMIF HI Z BOOT_EN MP/MC DON PON ST0 ST1 GLOBAL MEMORY AND CPU INTERRUPT REGISTERS 00004h 00005h 00006h Reserved IMR GREG IFR SYSTEM REGISTERS 07010h 07011h 07012h 07013h 07014h 07015h 07016h 07019h PIACKR0 PIACKR1 PIACKR2 SCSR1 SCSR2 Illegal DIN15 DIN14 DIN13 DIN12 DIN11 DIN10 DIN9 DIN8 DIN7 DIN6 DIN5 DIN4 DIN3 DIN2 DIN1 DIN0 V15 V14 V13 V12 V11 V10 V9 V8 V7 V6 V5 V4 V3 V2 V1 V0 0701Dh 0701Eh PIRQR2 Illegal 0701Ah to 0701Bh 0701Ch PIRQR1 Illegal 07017h 07018h PIRQR0 DINR Illegal 0701Fh PIVR Illegal Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, C242 device register maps. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 113 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register descriptions (continued) Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description (Continued) ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 D3 D2 D1 D0 WDCNTR D3 D2 D1 D0 WDKEY WDCHK0 WDPS2 WDPS1 WDPS0 WDCR REG WD CONTROL REGISTERS 07020h to 07022h 07023h Illegal D7 D6 D5 D4 07024h 07025h Illegal D7 D6 D5 D4 07026h to 07028h 07029h Illegal WDFLAG WDDIS WDCHK2 WDCHK1 0702Ah to 0703Fh Illegal SERIAL PERIPHERAL INTERFACE (SPI) CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTERS 07040h SPI SW RESET CLOCK POLARITY — — SPI CHAR3 SPI CHAR2 SPI CHAR1 SPI CHAR0 SPICCR 07041h — — — OVERRUN INT ENA CLOCK PHASE MASTER/ SLAVE TALK SPI INT ENA SPICTL 07042h RECEIVER OVERRUN FLAG SPI INT FLAG TX BUF FULL FLAG — — — — — SPISTS — SPI BIT RATE 6 SPI BIT RATE 5 SPI BIT RATE 4 SPI BIT RATE 3 SPI BIT RATE 2 SPI BIT RATE 1 SPI BIT RATE 0 SPIBRR ERXB15 ERXB14 ERXB13 ERXB12 ERXB11 ERXB10 ERXB9 ERXB8 ERXB7 ERXB6 ERXB5 ERXB4 ERXB3 ERXB2 ERXB1 ERXB0 RXB15 RXB14 RXB13 RXB12 RXB11 RXB10 RXB9 RXB8 RXB7 RXB6 RXB5 RXB4 RXB3 RXB2 RXB1 RXB0 TXB15 TXB14 TXB13 TXB12 TXB11 TXB10 TXB9 TXB8 TXB7 TXB6 TXB5 TXB4 TXB3 TXB2 TXB1 TXB0 SDAT15 SDAT14 SDAT13 SDAT12 SDAT11 SDAT10 SDAT9 SDAT8 SDAT7 SDAT6 SDAT5 SDAT4 SDAT3 SDAT2 SDAT1 SDAT0 — — — — 07043h 07044h Illegal 07045h 07046h 07047h 07048h 07049h Illegal 0704Ah to 0704Eh 0704Fh SPIRXBUF SPITXBUF SPIDAT Illegal — SPI PRIORITY SPI SUSP SOFT SPI SUSP FREE Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, F243/F241 C242 device register maps maps. 114 SPIRXEMU POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 SPIPRI TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register descriptions (continued) Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description (Continued) ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 REG SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE (SCI) CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTERS 07050h STOP BITS EVEN/ODD PARITY PARITY ENABLE LOOP BACK ENA ADDR/IDLE MODE SCI CHAR2 SCI CHAR1 SCI CHAR0 SCICCR 07051h — RX ERR INT ENA SW RESET — TXWAKE SLEEP TXENA RXENA SCICTL1 07052h BAUD15 (MSB) BAUD14 BAUD13 BAUD12 BAUD11 BAUD10 BAUD9 BAUD8 SCIHBAUD 07053h BAUD7 BAUD6 BAUD5 BAUD4 BAUD3 BAUD2 BAUD1 BAUD0 (LSB) SCILBAUD 07054h TXRDY TX EMPTY — — — — RX/BK INT ENA TX INT ENA SCICTL2 07055h RX ERROR RXRDY BRKDT FE OE PE RXWAKE — SCIRXST 07056h ERXDT7 ERXDT6 ERXDT5 ERXDT4 ERXDT3 ERXDT2 ERXDT1 ERXDT0 SCIRXEMU 07057h RXDT7 RXDT6 RXDT5 RXDT4 RXDT3 RXDT2 RXDT1 RXDT0 SCIRXBUF TXDT2 TXDT1 TXDT0 SCITXBUF — — — 07058h 07059h Illegal TXDT7 TXDT6 TXDT5 TXDT4 0705Ah to 0705Eh 0705Fh TXDT3 Illegal — SCITX PRIORITY SCIRX PRIORITY SCI SOFT 07060h to 0706Fh SCI FREE SCIPRI Illegal EXTERNAL INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS 07070h 07071h XINT1 FLAG — — — — — — — — — — — — XINT1 POLARITY XINT1 PRIORITY XINT1 ENA XINT2 FLAG — — — — — — — — — — — — XINT2 POLARITY XINT2 PRIORITY XINT2 ENA 07072h to 0708Fh XINT1CR XINT2CR Illegal DIGITAL I/O CONTROL REGISTERS 07090h MCRA.15 MCRA.14 MCRA.13 MCRA.12 MCRA.11 MCRA.10 MCRA.9 MCRA.8 MCRA.7 MCRA.6 MCRA.5 MCRA.4 MCRA.3 MCRA.2 MCRA.1 MCRA.0 MCRB.15 MCRB.14 MCRB.13 MCRB.12 MCRB.11 MCRB.10 MCRB.9 MCRB.8 MCRB.7 MCRB.6 MCRB.5 MCRB.4 MCRB.3 MCRB.2 MCRB.1 MCRB.0 MCRC.15 MCRC.14 MCRC.13 MCRC.12 MCRC.11 MCRC.10 MCRC.9 MCRC.8 MCRC.7 MCRC.6 MCRC.5 MCRC.4 MCRC.3 MCRC.2 MCRC.1 MCRC.0 E7DIR E6DIR E5DIR E4DIR E3DIR E2DIR E1DIR E0DIR IOPE7 IOPE6 IOPE5 IOPE4 IOPE3 IOPE2 IOPE1 IOPE0 07091h 07092h Illegal 07093h 07094h 07095h MCRA MCRB Illegal MCRC PEDATDIR Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, F243/F241 C242 device register maps maps. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 115 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register descriptions (continued) Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description (Continued) ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 REG DIGITAL I/O CONTROL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) 07096h 07098h — F6DIR F5DIR F4DIR F3DIR F2DIR F1DIR F0DIR — IOPF6 IOPF5 IOPF4 IOPF3 IOPF2 IOPF1 IOPF0 A7DIR A6DIR A5DIR A4DIR A3DIR A2DIR A1DIR A0DIR IOPA7 IOPA6 IOPA5 IOPA4 IOPA3 IOPA2 IOPA1 IOPA0 B7DIR B6DIR B5DIR B4DIR B3DIR B2DIR B1DIR B0DIR IOPB7 IOPB6 IOPB5 IOPB4 IOPB3 IOPB2 IOPB1 IOPB0 07099h 0709Ah PBDATDIR Illegal C7DIR C6DIR C5DIR C4DIR C3DIR C2DIR C1DIR C0DIR IOPC7 IOPC6 IOPC5 IOPC4 IOPC3 IOPC2 IOPC1 IOPC0 — — — — — — — D0DIR — — — — — — — IOPD0 0709Dh 0709Eh PADATDIR Illegal 0709Bh 0709Ch PFDATDIR PCDATDIR Illegal 0709Fh PDDATDIR Illegal ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) REGISTERS 070A0h 070A1h 070A2h 070A3h 070A4h 070A5h 070A6h 070A7h 070A8h 070A9h 070AAh — ADC S/W RESET SOFT FREE ACQ PRESCALE3 ACQ PRESCALE2 ACQ PRESCALE1 ACQ PRESCALE0 CONV PRESCALE (CPS) CONTINUOUS RUN INT PRIORITY SEQ1/2 CASCADE — — — — EVB SOC EN SEQ1 RESET SEQ1 SOC SEQ1 SEQ1 BUSY INT ENA SEQ1 Mode1 INT ENA SEQ1 Mode0 INT FLAG SEQ1 EVA SOC EN SEQ1 EXT SOC EN SEQ1 Reset SEQ2 SOC SEQ2 SEQ2 BUSY INT ENA SEQ2 Mode1 INT ENA SEQ2 Mode0 INT FLAG SEQ2 EVB SOC EN SEQ2 — — — — — — — — — MAXCONV2 2 MAXCONV2 1 MAXCONV2 0 MAXCONV1 3 MAXCONV1 2 MAXCONV1 1 MAXCONV1 0 CONV 3 CONV 3 CONV 3 CONV 3 CONV 2 CONV 2 CONV 2 CONV 2 CONV 1 CONV 1 CONV 1 CONV 1 CONV 0 CONV 0 CONV 0 CONV 0 CONV 7 CONV 7 CONV 7 CONV 7 CONV 6 CONV 6 CONV 6 CONV 6 CONV 5 CONV 5 CONV 5 CONV 5 CONV 4 CONV 4 CONV 4 CONV 4 CONV 11 CONV 11 CONV 11 CONV 11 CONV 10 CONV 10 CONV 10 CONV 10 CONV 9 CONV 9 CONV 9 CONV 9 CONV 8 CONV 8 CONV 8 CONV 8 CONV 15 CONV 15 CONV 15 CONV 15 CONV 14 CONV 14 CONV 14 CONV 14 CONV 13 CONV 13 CONV 13 CONV 13 CONV 12 CONV 12 CONV 12 CONV 12 — — — — SEQ CNTR3 SEQ CNTR2 SEQ CNTR1 SEQ CNTR0 SEQ2 STATE 3 SEQ2 STATE 2 SEQ2 STATE 1 SEQ2 STATE 0 SEQ1 STATE 3 SEQ1 STATE 2 SEQ1 STATE 1 SEQ1 STATE 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, F243/F241 C242 device register maps maps. 116 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 ADCTRL1 ADCTRL2 MAXCONV CHSELSEQ1 CHSELSEQ2 CHSELSEQ3 CHSELSEQ4 AUTO_SEQ_SR RESULT0 RESULT1 RESULT2 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register descriptions (continued) Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description (Continued) ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 REG ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER (ADC) REGISTERS (CONTINUED) 070ABh 070ACh 070ADh 070AEh 070AFh 070B0h 070B1h 070B2h 070B3h 070B4h 070B5h 070B6h 070B7h D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 00 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0 0 0 0 0 0 070B8h Reserved 070B9h to 070FFh Illegal RESULT3 RESULT4 RESULT5 RESULT6 RESULT7 RESULT8 RESULT9 RESULT10 RESULT11 RESULT12 RESULT13 RESULT14 RESULT15 CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTERS 07100h 07101h 07102h 07103h 07104h — — — — — — — — MD3 MD2 ME5 ME4 ME3 ME2 ME1 ME0 TA5 TA4 TA3 TA2 AA5 AA4 AA3 AA2 TRS5 TRS4 TRS3 TRS2 TRR5 TRR4 TRR3 TRR2 RFP3 RFP2 RFP1 RFP0 RML3 RML2 RML1 RML0 RMP3 RMP2 RMP1 RMP0 OPC3 OPC2 OPC1 OPC0 — — SUSP CCR PDR DBO WUBA CDR ABO STM — — — — MBNR1 MBNR0 — — — — — — — — BRP7 BRP6 BRP5 BRP4 BRP3 BRP2 BRP1 BRP0 MDER TCR RCR MCR BCR2 Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, F243/F241 C242 device register maps maps. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 117 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register descriptions (continued) Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description (Continued) ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 REG CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) 07105h 07106h 07107h 07108h 07109h 0710Ah 0710Bh 0710Ch 0710Dh 0710Eh — — — — — SBG SJW1 SJW0 SAM TSEG1−3 TSEG1−2 TSEG1−1 TSEG1−0 TSEG2−2 TSEG2−1 TSEG2−0 — — — — — — — FER BEF SA1 CRCE SER ACKE BO EP EW — — — — — — — — — — SMA CCE PDA — RM TM TEC7 TEC6 TEC5 TEC4 TEC3 TEC2 TEC1 TEC0 REC7 REC6 REC5 REC4 REC3 REC2 REC1 REC0 — — MIF5 MIF4 MIF3 MIF2 MIF1 MIF0 — RMLIF AAIF WDIF WUIF BOIF EPIF WLIF MIL — MIM5 MIM4 MIM3 MIM2 MIM1 MIM0 EIL RMLIM AAIM WDIM WUIM BOIM EPIM WLIM LAMI — — LAM0−28 LAM0−27 LAM0−26 LAM0−25 LAM0−24 LAM0−23 LAM0−22 LAM0−21 LAM0−20 LAM0−19 LAM0−18 LAM0−17 LAM0−16 LAM0−15 LAM0−14 LAM0−13 LAM0−12 LAM0−11 LAM0−10 LAM0−9 LAM0−8 LAM0−7 LAM0−6 LAM0−5 LAM0−4 LAM0−3 LAM0−2 LAM0−1 LAM0−0 LAMI — — LAM1−28 LAM1−27 LAM1−26 LAM1−25 LAM1−24 LAM1−23 LAM1−22 LAM1−21 LAM1−20 LAM1−19 LAM1−18 LAM1−17 LAM1−16 LAM1−15 LAM1−14 LAM1−13 LAM1−12 LAM1−11 LAM1−10 LAM1−9 LAM1−8 LAM1−7 LAM1−6 LAM1−5 LAM1−4 LAM1−3 LAM1−2 LAM1−1 LAM1−0 0710Fh to 071FFh BCR1 ESR GSR CEC CAN IFR CAN_IFR CAN IMR CAN_IMR LAM0 H LAM0_H LAM0 L LAM0_L LAM1 H LAM1_H LAM1 L LAM1_L Illegal Message Object #0 07200h 07201h 07202h IDL−15 IDL−14 IDL−13 IDL−12 IDL−11 IDL−10 IDL−9 IDL−8 IDL−7 IDL−6 IDL−5 IDL−4 IDL−3 IDL−2 IDL−1 IDL−0 IDE AME AAM IDH−28 IDH−27 IDH−26 IDH−25 IDH−24 IDH−23 IDH−22 IDH−21 IDH−20 IDH−19 IDH−18 IDH−17 IDH−16 — — — — — — — — — — — RTR DLC3 DLC2 DLC1 DLC0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 07203h 07204h 07205h 07206h 07207h MSGID0H MSGCTRL0 Reserved Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, F243/F241 C242 device register maps maps. 118 MSGID0L POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 MBX0A MBX0B MBX0C MBX0D TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register descriptions (continued) Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description (Continued) ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 REG CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) Message Object #1 07208h 07209h 0720Ah IDL−15 IDL−14 IDL−13 IDL−12 IDL−11 IDL−10 IDL−9 IDL−8 IDL−7 IDL−6 IDL−5 IDL−4 IDL−3 IDL−2 IDL−1 IDL−0 IDE AME AAM IDH−28 IDH−27 IDH−26 IDH−25 IDH−24 IDH−23 IDH−22 IDH−21 IDH−20 IDH−19 IDH−18 IDH−17 IDH−16 — — — — — — — — — — — RTR DLC3 DLC2 DLC1 DLC0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 IDL−15 IDL−14 IDL−13 IDL−12 IDL−11 IDL−10 IDL−9 IDL−8 IDL−7 IDL−6 IDL−5 IDL−4 IDL−3 IDL−2 IDL−1 IDL−0 0720Bh 0720Ch 0720Dh 0720Eh 0720Fh MSGID1L MSGID1H MSGCTRL1 Reserved MBX1A MBX1B MBX1C MBX1D Message Object #2 07210h 07211h 07212h IDE AME AAM IDH−28 IDH−27 IDH−26 IDH−25 IDH−24 IDH−23 IDH−22 IDH−21 IDH−20 IDH−19 IDH−18 IDH−17 IDH−16 — — — — — — — — — — — RTR DLC3 DLC2 DLC1 DLC0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 IDL−15 IDL−14 IDL−13 IDL−12 IDL−11 IDL−10 IDL−9 IDL−8 IDL−7 IDL−6 IDL−5 IDL−4 IDL−3 IDL−2 IDL−1 IDL−0 07213h 07214h 07215h 07216h 07217h MSGID2L MSGID2H MSGCTRL2 Reserved MBX2A MBX2B MBX2C MBX2D Message Object #3 07218h 07219h 0721Ah IDE AME AAM IDH−28 IDH−27 IDH−26 IDH−25 IDH−24 IDH−23 IDH−22 IDH−21 IDH−20 IDH−19 IDH−18 IDH−17 IDH−16 — — — — — — — — — — — RTR DLC3 DLC2 DLC1 DLC0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0721Bh 0721Ch MSGID3L MSGID3H MSGCTRL3 Reserved MBX3A Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, F243/F241 C242 device register maps maps. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 119 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register descriptions (continued) Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description (Continued) ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 REG CONTROLLER AREA NETWORK (CAN) CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTERS (CONTINUED) 0721Dh 0721Eh 0721Fh D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 MBX3B MBX3C MBX3D Message Object #4 07220h 07221h 07222h IDL−15 IDL−14 IDL−13 IDL−12 IDL−11 IDL−10 IDL−9 IDL−8 IDL−7 IDL−6 IDL−5 IDL−4 IDL−3 IDL−2 IDL−1 IDL−0 IDE AME AAM IDH−28 IDH−27 IDH−26 IDH−25 IDH−24 IDH−23 IDH−22 IDH−21 IDH−20 IDH−19 IDH−18 IDH−17 IDH−16 — — — — — — — — — — — RTR DLC3 DLC2 DLC1 DLC0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 IDL−15 IDL−14 IDL−13 IDL−12 IDL−11 IDL−10 IDL−9 IDL−8 IDL−7 IDL−6 IDL−5 IDL−4 IDL−3 IDL−2 IDL−1 IDL−0 07223h 07224h 07225h 07226h 07227h MSGID4L MSGID4H MSGCTRL4 Reserved MBX4A MBX4B MBX4C MBX4D Message Object #5 07228h 07229h 0722Ah IDE AME AAM IDH−28 IDH−27 IDH−26 IDH−25 IDH−24 IDH−23 IDH−22 IDH−21 IDH−20 IDH−19 IDH−18 IDH−17 IDH−16 — — — — — — — — — — — RTR DLC3 DLC2 DLC1 DLC0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 0722Bh 0722Ch 0722Dh 0722Eh 0722Fh MSGID5H MSGCTRL5 Reserved 07230h to 073FFh Illegal Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, F243/F241 C242 device register maps maps. 120 MSGID5L POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 MBX5A MBX5B MBX5C MBX5D TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register descriptions (continued) Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description (Continued) ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 REG GENERAL-PURPOSE (GP) TIMER CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTERS − EVA 07400h 07401h 07402h 07403h 07404h 07405h 07406h 07407h 07408h — T2STAT T1TOADC(0) TCOMPOE T1STAT — T2TOADC D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 FREE SOFT — TMODE1 TMODE0 TPS2 TPS1 TPS0 — TENABLE TCLKS1 TCLKS0 TCLD1 TCLD0 TECMPR — D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 FREE SOFT — TMODE1 TMODE0 TPS2 TPS1 TPS0 T2SWT1 TENABLE TCLKS1 TCLKS0 TCLD1 TCLD0 TECMPR SELT1PR — T1TOADC(1) T2PIN 07409h to 07410h T1PIN GPTCONA T1CNT T1CMPR T1PR T1CON T2CNT T2CMPR T2PR T2CON Illegal FULL AND SIMPLE COMPARE UNIT REGISTERS − EVA 07411h CENABLE CLD1 CLD0 SVENABLE ACTRLD1 ACTRLD0 FCOMPOE PDPINTA STATUS — — — — — — — — SVRDIR D2 D1 D0 CMP6ACT1 CMP6ACT0 CMP5ACT1 CMP5ACT0 CMP4ACT1 CMP4ACT0 CMP3ACT1 CMP3ACT0 CMP2ACT1 CMP2ACT0 CMP1ACT1 CMP1ACT0 — — — — DBT3 DBT2 DBT1 DBT0 EDBT3 EDBT2 EDBT1 DBTPS2 DBTPS1 DBTPS0 — — D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 07412h 07413h Illegal 07414h 07415h 07418h 07419h 0741Ah to 0741Fh ACTRA Illegal 07416h 07417h COMCONA DBTCONA Illegal CMPR1 CMPR2 CMPR3 Illegal Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, F243/F241 C242 device register maps maps. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 121 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register descriptions (continued) Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description (Continued) ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 CAP3TSEL CAP12TSEL REG CAPTURE UNIT REGISTERS − EVA 07420h CAPRES CAPQEPN CAP3EN CAP1EDGE CAP2EDGE — CAP3FIFO CAP3EDGE 07421h 07422h 07423h 07424h 07425h 07428h 07429h CAP3TOADC — CAPCONA Illegal CAP2FIFO CAP1FIFO — — — — — — — — D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 07426h 07427h — CAPFIFOA CAP1FIFO CAP2FIFO CAP3FIFO Illegal 0742Ah to 0742Bh CAP1FBOT CAP2FBOT CAP3FBOT Illegal EVENT MANAGER (EVA) INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS 0742Ch 0742Dh 0742Eh 0742Fh 07430h 07431h — — — — — T1OFINT ENA T1UFINT ENA T1CINT ENA T1PINT ENA — — — CMP3INT ENA CMP2INT ENA CMP1INT ENA PDPINTA ENA — — — — — — — — T2UFINT ENA T2CINT ENA T2PINT ENA — — — — T2OFINT ENA — — — — — — — — CAP2INT ENA CAP1INT ENA — — — — — CAP3INT ENA — — — — — T1OFINT FLAG T1UFINT FLAG T1CINT FLAG T1PINT FLAG — — — CMP3INT FLAG CMP2INT FLAG CMP1INT FLAG PDPINTA FLAG — — — — — — — — T2UFINT FLAG T2CINT FLAG T2PINT FLAG — — — — T2OFINT FLAG — — — — — — — — — CAP3INT FLAG CAP2INT FLAG CAP1INT FLAG — — — — 07432h to 074FFh Illegal Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, F243/F241 C242 device register maps maps. 122 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 EVAIMRA EVAIMRB EVAIMRC EVAIFRA EVAIFRB EVAIFRC TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register descriptions (continued) Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description (Continued) ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 REG GENERAL-PURPOSE (GP) TIMER CONFIGURATION CONTROL REGISTERS − EVB 07500h 07501h 07502h 07503h 07504h 07505h 07506h 07507h 07508h — T4STAT T3TOADC(0) TCOMPOEB T3STAT — T4TOADC D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 FREE SOFT — TMODE1 TMODE0 TPS2 TPS1 TPS0 — TENABLE TCLKS1 TCLKS0 TCLD1 TCLD0 TECMPR — D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 FREE SOFT — TMODE1 TMODE0 TPS2 TPS1 TPS0 T4SWT3 TENABLE TCLKS1 TCLKS0 TCLD1 TCLD0 TECMPR SELT3PR — T3TOADC(1) T4PIN 07509h to 07510h T3PIN GPTCONB T3CNT T3CMPR T3PR T3CON T4CNT T4CMPR T4PR T4CON Reserved FULL AND SIMPLE COMPARE UNIT REGISTERS− EVB 07511h CENABLE CLD1 CLD0 SVENABLE ACTRLD1 ACTRLD0 FCOMPOEB PDPINTB STATUS — — — — — — — — SVRDIR D2 D1 D0 CMP12ACT1 CMP12ACT0 CMP11ACT1 CMP11ACT0 CMP10ACT1 CMP10ACT0 CMP9ACT1 CMP9ACT0 CMP8ACT1 CMP8ACT0 CMP7ACT1 CMP7ACT0 — — — — DBT3 DBT2 DBT1 DBT0 EDBT3 EDBT2 EDBT1 DBTPS2 DBTPS1 DBTPS0 — — D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 07512h 07513h Reserved 07514h 07515h 07518h 07519h 0751Ah to 0751Fh ACTRB Reserved 07516h 07517h COMCONB DBTCONB Reserved CMPR4 CMPR5 CMPR6 Reserved Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, F243/F241 C242 device register maps maps. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 123 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register descriptions (continued) Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description (Continued) ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 CAP6TSEL CAP45SEL REG CAPTURE UNIT REGISTERS− EVB 07520h CAPRES CAPQEPN CAP6EN CAP4EDGE CAP5EDGE — CAP6FIFO CAP6EDGE 07521h 07522h 07523h 07524h 07525h 07528h 07529h CAP6TOADC — CAPCONB Reserved CAP5FIFO CAP4FIFO — — — — — — — — D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 D15 D14 D13 D12 D11 D10 D9 D8 D7 D6 D5 D4 D3 D2 D1 D0 07526h 07527h — CAPFIFOB CAP4FIFO CAP5FIFO CAP6FIFO Reserved 0752Ah to 0752Bh CAP4FBOT CAP5FBOT CAP6FBOT Reserved EVENT MANAGER (EVB) INTERRUPT CONTROL REGISTERS 0752Ch 0752Dh 0752Eh 0752Fh 07530h 07531h 07532h to 0753Fh — — — — — T3OFINT ENA T3UFINT ENA T3CINT ENA T3PINT ENA — — — CMP6INT ENA CMP5INT ENA CMP4INT ENA PDPINTB ENA — — — — — — — — T4UFINT ENA T4CINT ENA T4PINT ENA — — — — T4OFINT ENA — — — — — — — — CAP5INT ENA CAP4INT ENA — — — — — CAP6INT ENA — — — — — T3OFINT FLAG T3UFINT FLAG T3CINT FLAG T3PINT FLAG — — — CMP6INT FLAG CMP5INT FLAG CMP4INT FLAG PDPINTB FLAG — — — — — — — — T4UFINT FLAG T4CINT FLAG T4PINT FLAG — — — — T4OFINT FLAG — — — — — — — — — CAP6INT FLAG CAP5INT FLAG CAP4INT FLAG — — — — Reserved Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, F243/F241 C242 device register maps maps. 124 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 EVBIMRA EVBIMRB EVBIMRC EVBIFRA EVBIFRB EVBIFRC TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 peripheral register descriptions (continued) Table 19. LF240xA/LC240xA DSP Peripheral Register Description (Continued) ADDR BIT 15 BIT 14 BIT 13 BIT 12 BIT 11 BIT 10 BIT 9 BIT 8 BIT 7 BIT 6 BIT 5 BIT 4 BIT 3 BIT 2 BIT 1 BIT 0 REG KEY REGISTERS 077F0h High Word of the 64 64-Bit Bit KEY Register KEY3 077F1h Third Word of the 64 64-Bit Bit KEY Register KEY2 077F2h Second Word of the 64 64-Bit Bit KEY Register KEY1 Low Word of the 64-Bit 64 Bit KEY Register KEY0 077F3h PROGRAM MEMORY SPACE − FLASH REGISTERS 0xx00h 0xx01h — — — — — — — — — — — — PWR DWN KEY1 KEY0 EXEC — — — — — — WSVER EN PRECND Mode1 PRECND Mode0 ENG/R Mode2 ENG/R Mode1 ENG/R Mode0 FCM3 FCM2 FCM1 FCM0 PMPC CTRL† 0xx02h WADDR 0xx03h WDATA 0xx04h 0xx05h 0xx06h — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — SECT 4 ENABLE SECT 3 ENABLE SECT 2 ENABLE SECT 1 ENABLE — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — — BVIS.1 BVIS.0 ISWS.2 ISWS.1 ISWS.0 DSWS.2 DSWS.1 DSWS.0 PSWS.2 PSWS.1 PSWS.0 TCR ENAB SECT I/O MEMORY SPACE 0FF0Fh FCMR WAIT-STATE GENERATOR CONTROL REGISTER 0FFFFh WSGR Indicates change with respect to the F243/F241, F243/F241 C242 device register maps maps. † Register shown with bits set in register mode. POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 125 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 MECHANICAL DATA Table 20 through Table 23 provide the typical thermal resistance characteristics for each mechanical package. Table 20. Typical Thermal Resistance Characteristics for the PAG Package PARAMETER DESCRIPTION °C / W ΘJA Junction-to-ambient 42 ΘJC Junction-to-case 7 Ψjt Junction-to-top of package 0.5 Table 21. Typical Thermal Resistance Characteristics for the PG Package PARAMETER DESCRIPTION °C / W ΘJA Junction-to-ambient 35 ΘJC Junction-to-case 11 Ψjt Junction-to-top of package 1.0 Table 22. Typical Thermal Resistance Characteristics for the PGE Package PARAMETER DESCRIPTION °C / W ΘJA Junction-to-ambient 32 ΘJC Junction-to-case 8 Ψjt Junction-to-top of package 0.5 Table 23. Typical Thermal Resistance Characteristics for the PZ Package 126 PARAMETER DESCRIPTION °C / W ΘJA Junction-to-ambient 42 ΘJC Junction-to-case 8 Ψjt Junction-to-top of package 0.5 POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 TMS320LF2407A, TMS320LF2406A, TMS320LF2403A, TMS320LF2402A TMS320LC2406A, TMS320LC2404A, TMS320LC2403A, TMS320LC2402A DSP CONTROLLERS SPRS145K − JULY 2000 − REVISED AUGUST 2005 MECHANICAL DATA (CONTINUED) The following mechanical package diagram(s) reflect the most current released mechanical data available for the designated device(s). POST OFFICE BOX 1443 • HOUSTON, TEXAS 77251−1443 127 PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 6-Dec-2006 PACKAGING INFORMATION Orderable Device Status (1) Package Type Package Drawing Pins Package Eco Plan (2) Qty TMS320LC2402APAGA ACTIVE TQFP PAG 64 TBD Call TI Call TI TMS320LC2402APAGS ACTIVE TQFP PAG 64 TBD Call TI Call TI TMS320LC2402APGA ACTIVE QFP PG 64 TBD Call TI Call TI TMS320LC2402APGS ACTIVE QFP PG 64 TBD Call TI Call TI TMS320LC2403APAGA ACTIVE TQFP PAG 64 TBD Call TI Call TI TMS320LC2403APAGS ACTIVE TQFP PAG 64 TBD Call TI Call TI TMS320LC2406APZA ACTIVE LQFP PZ 100 TBD Call TI Call TI TMS320LC2406APZS ACTIVE LQFP PZ 100 TBD Call TI Call TI TMS320LF2402APGA ACTIVE QFP PG 64 66 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-4-260C-72HR TMS320LF2402APGAR ACTIVE QFP PG 64 400 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-4-260C-72HR TMS320LF2402APGS ACTIVE QFP PG 64 66 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-4-260C-72HR TMS320LF2403APAGA ACTIVE TQFP PAG 64 160 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-3-260C-168HR TMS320LF2403APAGS ACTIVE TQFP PAG 64 160 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-3-260C-168HR TMS320LF2406APZA ACTIVE LQFP PZ 100 90 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1YR TMS320LF2406APZAR ACTIVE LQFP PZ 100 1000 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1YR TMS320LF2406APZS ACTIVE LQFP PZ 100 90 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-2-260C-1YR TMS320LF2407APGEA ACTIVE LQFP PGE 144 60 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM TMS320LF2407APGES ACTIVE LQFP PGE 144 60 Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) CU NIPDAU Level-1-260C-UNLIM Lead/Ball Finish MSL Peak Temp (3) (1) The marketing status values are defined as follows: ACTIVE: Product device recommended for new designs. LIFEBUY: TI has announced that the device will be discontinued, and a lifetime-buy period is in effect. NRND: Not recommended for new designs. Device is in production to support existing customers, but TI does not recommend using this part in a new design. PREVIEW: Device has been announced but is not in production. Samples may or may not be available. OBSOLETE: TI has discontinued the production of the device. (2) Eco Plan - The planned eco-friendly classification: Pb-Free (RoHS), Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt), or Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br) - please check http://www.ti.com/productcontent for the latest availability information and additional product content details. TBD: The Pb-Free/Green conversion plan has not been defined. Pb-Free (RoHS): TI's terms "Lead-Free" or "Pb-Free" mean semiconductor products that are compatible with the current RoHS requirements for all 6 substances, including the requirement that lead not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous materials. Where designed to be soldered at high temperatures, TI Pb-Free products are suitable for use in specified lead-free processes. Pb-Free (RoHS Exempt): This component has a RoHS exemption for either 1) lead-based flip-chip solder bumps used between the die and package, or 2) lead-based die adhesive used between the die and leadframe. The component is otherwise considered Pb-Free (RoHS compatible) as defined above. Green (RoHS & no Sb/Br): TI defines "Green" to mean Pb-Free (RoHS compatible), and free of Bromine (Br) and Antimony (Sb) based flame retardants (Br or Sb do not exceed 0.1% by weight in homogeneous material) (3) MSL, Peak Temp. -- The Moisture Sensitivity Level rating according to the JEDEC industry standard classifications, and peak solder temperature. Addendum-Page 1 PACKAGE OPTION ADDENDUM www.ti.com 6-Dec-2006 Important Information and Disclaimer:The information provided on this page represents TI's knowledge and belief as of the date that it is provided. TI bases its knowledge and belief on information provided by third parties, and makes no representation or warranty as to the accuracy of such information. Efforts are underway to better integrate information from third parties. TI has taken and continues to take reasonable steps to provide representative and accurate information but may not have conducted destructive testing or chemical analysis on incoming materials and chemicals. TI and TI suppliers consider certain information to be proprietary, and thus CAS numbers and other limited information may not be available for release. In no event shall TI's liability arising out of such information exceed the total purchase price of the TI part(s) at issue in this document sold by TI to Customer on an annual basis. Addendum-Page 2 MECHANICAL DATA MQFP008 – JULY 1998 PG (R-PQFP-G64) PLASTIC QUAD FLATPACK 0,45 0,25 1,00 51 0,20 M 33 52 32 12,00 TYP 64 14,20 13,80 18,00 17,20 20 1 19 0,15 NOM 18,00 TYP 20,20 19,80 24,00 23,20 Gage Plane 0,25 0,10 MIN 2,70 TYP 0°– 10° 1,10 0,70 Seating Plane 3,10 MAX 0,10 4040101 / B 03/95 NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters. B. This drawing is subject to change without notice. C. Contact field sales office to determine if a tighter coplanarity requirement is available for this package. POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 1 MECHANICAL DATA MTQF006A – JANUARY 1995 – REVISED DECEMBER 1996 PAG (S-PQFP-G64) PLASTIC QUAD FLATPACK 0,27 0,17 0,50 48 0,08 M 33 49 32 64 17 0,13 NOM 1 16 7,50 TYP Gage Plane 10,20 SQ 9,80 12,20 SQ 11,80 0,25 0,05 MIN 1,05 0,95 0°– 7° 0,75 0,45 Seating Plane 0,08 1,20 MAX 4040282 / C 11/96 NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters. B. This drawing is subject to change without notice. C. Falls within JEDEC MS-026 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 MECHANICAL DATA MTQF013A – OCTOBER 1994 – REVISED DECEMBER 1996 PZ (S-PQFP-G100) PLASTIC QUAD FLATPACK 0,27 0,17 0,50 75 0,08 M 51 76 50 100 26 1 0,13 NOM 25 12,00 TYP Gage Plane 14,20 SQ 13,80 16,20 SQ 15,80 0,05 MIN 1,45 1,35 0,25 0°– 7° 0,75 0,45 Seating Plane 0,08 1,60 MAX 4040149 /B 11/96 NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters. B. This drawing is subject to change without notice. C. Falls within JEDEC MS-026 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 1 MECHANICAL DATA MTQF017A – OCTOBER 1994 – REVISED DECEMBER 1996 PGE (S-PQFP-G144) PLASTIC QUAD FLATPACK 108 73 109 72 0,27 0,17 0,08 M 0,50 144 0,13 NOM 37 1 36 Gage Plane 17,50 TYP 20,20 SQ 19,80 22,20 SQ 21,80 0,25 0,05 MIN 0°– 7° 0,75 0,45 1,45 1,35 Seating Plane 0,08 1,60 MAX 4040147 / C 10/96 NOTES: A. All linear dimensions are in millimeters. B. This drawing is subject to change without notice. C. Falls within JEDEC MS-026 POST OFFICE BOX 655303 • DALLAS, TEXAS 75265 1 IMPORTANT NOTICE Texas Instruments Incorporated and its subsidiaries (TI) reserve the right to make corrections, modifications, enhancements, improvements, and other changes to its products and services at any time and to discontinue any product or service without notice. Customers should obtain the latest relevant information before placing orders and should verify that such information is current and complete. All products are sold subject to TI’s terms and conditions of sale supplied at the time of order acknowledgment. TI warrants performance of its hardware products to the specifications applicable at the time of sale in accordance with TI’s standard warranty. Testing and other quality control techniques are used to the extent TI deems necessary to support this warranty. Except where mandated by government requirements, testing of all parameters of each product is not necessarily performed. TI assumes no liability for applications assistance or customer product design. Customers are responsible for their products and applications using TI components. To minimize the risks associated with customer products and applications, customers should provide adequate design and operating safeguards. TI does not warrant or represent that any license, either express or implied, is granted under any TI patent right, copyright, mask work right, or other TI intellectual property right relating to any combination, machine, or process in which TI products or services are used. Information published by TI regarding third-party products or services does not constitute a license from TI to use such products or services or a warranty or endorsement thereof. Use of such information may require a license from a third party under the patents or other intellectual property of the third party, or a license from TI under the patents or other intellectual property of TI. Reproduction of information in TI data books or data sheets is permissible only if reproduction is without alteration and is accompanied by all associated warranties, conditions, limitations, and notices. Reproduction of this information with alteration is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for such altered documentation. Resale of TI products or services with statements different from or beyond the parameters stated by TI for that product or service voids all express and any implied warranties for the associated TI product or service and is an unfair and deceptive business practice. TI is not responsible or liable for any such statements. Following are URLs where you can obtain information on other Texas Instruments products and application solutions: Products Applications Amplifiers amplifier.ti.com Audio www.ti.com/audio Data Converters dataconverter.ti.com Automotive www.ti.com/automotive DSP dsp.ti.com Broadband www.ti.com/broadband Interface interface.ti.com Digital Control www.ti.com/digitalcontrol Logic logic.ti.com Military www.ti.com/military Power Mgmt power.ti.com Optical Networking www.ti.com/opticalnetwork Microcontrollers microcontroller.ti.com Security www.ti.com/security Low Power Wireless www.ti.com/lpw Mailing Address: Telephony www.ti.com/telephony Video & Imaging www.ti.com/video Wireless www.ti.com/wireless Texas Instruments Post Office Box 655303 Dallas, Texas 75265 Copyright 2006, Texas Instruments Incorporated